WEB EDITION
OWNER'S MANUAL
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving
pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been
designed for the safety and comfort of you and
your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in
the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to
satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we
recommend that you familiarise yourself with the
equipment, instructions and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
01 Introduction
Reading the owner's manual....................
Recording data.........................................
Accessories and extra equipment............
Change of ownership for cars with Volvo
On Call*.....................................................
Information on the Internet.......................
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy.....
The owner's manual and the environment..........................................................
Laminated glass........................................
02 Safety
13
15
16
General information on seatbelts..............
Seatbelt - putting on.................................
Seat belt - loosening.................................
Seatbelt - pregnancy................................
Seatbelt reminder......................................
Seatbelt tensioner.....................................
Safety - warning symbol...........................
Airbag system...........................................
Driver airbag..............................................
Passenger airbag......................................
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating*............................................................
Side airbag (SIPS).....................................
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion.....................................................
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................
General information on WHIPS (whiplash
protection).................................................
WHIPS - child seats..................................
WHIPS - seating position..........................
When the systems deploy.........................
General information on safety mode.........
Safety mode - attempting to start the
car.............................................................
Safety mode - moving the car..................
22
23
23
23
24
25
25
26
27
27
General information on child safety..........
Child seats................................................
Child seats - location................................
Child seat - ISOFIX...................................
ISOFIX - size classes................................
ISOFIX - types of child seat......................
Child seats - upper mounting points........
01 02 02
2
17
17
18
20
20
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
28
30
31
31
32
33
33
34
35
36
37
37
38
43
43
44
45
47
Table of contents
03 Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls, left-hand drive
car - overview...........................................
Instruments and controls, right-hand
drive car - overview...................................
Combined instrument panel......................
Analogue combined instrument panel overview....................................................
Digital combined instrument panel overview....................................................
Eco guide & Power guide*........................
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols......................................
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols...................................
Outside temperature gauge......................
Trip meter..................................................
Clock.........................................................
Volvo Sensus............................................
Key positions............................................
Key positions - functions at different levels..............................................................
Seats, front................................................
Seats, front - electrically operated............
Key memory* in remote control key..........
Seats, rear.................................................
49
52
55
Seats - Executive......................................
Steering wheel..........................................
Heating* of the steering wheel..................
Light switches...........................................
Position/parking lamps.............................
Daytime running lights..............................
Tunnel detection*......................................
Main/dipped beam....................................
Active high beam*.....................................
Active Xenon headlamps*.........................
Rear fog lamp...........................................
Brake lights...............................................
Hazard warning flashers...........................
Direction indicators...................................
Interior lighting..........................................
Home safe light duration...........................
Approach light duration............................
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern............................................................
Wipers and washing..................................
Power windows.........................................
Sun blind*..................................................
Door mirrors..............................................
72
74
75
75
77
78
78
79
80
81
82
83
83
84
84
86
86
Windows and rearview and door mirrors
- heating.................................................... 96
Rearview mirror - interior.......................... 96
Compass*................................................. 97
Sunroof*.................................................... 98
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel....................................................... 100
Menu overview - combined instrument
panel....................................................... 101
Messages................................................ 101
Messages - handling............................... 102
MY CAR.................................................. 103
Trip computer......................................... 104
Trip computer - combined instrument
panel "Analog"........................................ 105
Trip computer - combined instrument
panel "Digital"......................................... 109
Trip computer - supplementary information.......................................................... 112
Trip computer - trip statistics*................ 113
03 03 03
55
56
59
60
61
63
64
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
87
91
92
94
94
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
Table of contents
04 Climate control
General information on climate control... 115
Actual temperature................................. 116
Sensors - climate control........................ 116
Air cleaning............................................. 116
Air cleaning - passenger compartment filter............................................................ 117
Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*.............................................. 117
Air cleaning - IAQS*................................ 118
Air cleaning - material............................. 118
Menu settings - climate control.............. 118
Air distribution in the passenger compartment.................................................. 119
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 121
Heated front seats*................................. 122
Heated rear seat*.................................... 122
Ventilated front seats*............................. 123
Fan.......................................................... 124
Auto-regulation....................................... 124
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment.......................................... 124
Air conditioning....................................... 125
Demisting and defrosting the windscreen..................................................... 125
Air distribution - recirculation.................. 126
05 Loading and storage
Air distribution - table............................. 128
Engine and passenger compartment
heater*..................................................... 130
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start/immediate
stop......................................................... 131
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer.......................... 131
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages................. 133
Additional heater*.................................... 135
Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 135
Electric additional heater*....................... 136
Storage spaces.......................................
Jacket holder..........................................
Tunnel console........................................
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray*...................................................
Glovebox.................................................
Inlay mats*..............................................
Vanity mirror............................................
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets...............
Refrigerator box and glasses..................
Loading...................................................
Loading - long load.................................
Loading - ski hatch.................................
Roof load.................................................
Load retaining eyelets.............................
Loading - bag holder..............................
12 V electrical socket, cargo area*.........
04 04 05
4
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
138
140
140
140
141
141
141
142
143
144
145
145
146
146
147
147
Table of contents
06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade.........
Remote control key - losing ...................
Key memory*...........................................
Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting.
Immobiliser..............................................
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system.......................................
Remote control key - functions...............
Remote control key - range....................
PCC* - unique functions.........................
PCC* - range...........................................
Detachable key blade.............................
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching.................................................
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
Privacy locking*.......................................
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery.....................................................
Keyless drive*..........................................
Keyless drive* - PCC range....................
Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely
Keyless drive* - interference to PCC
function...................................................
Keyless drive* - locking...........................
Keyless drive* - unlocking.......................
07 Driver support
150
150
150
151
151
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key
blade ......................................................
Keyless drive* - key memory..................
Keyless drive* - lock settings..................
Keyless drive* - antenna location...........
Locking/unlocking - from the outside.....
Locking/unlocking - from the inside.......
Total airing function................................
Locking/unlocking - glovebox.................
Locking/unlocking - boot lid...................
Deadlocks*..............................................
Child safety locks - manual activation....
Child safety locks - electrical activation*
Alarm.......................................................
Alarm indicator........................................
Alarm - automatic re-arming...................
Alarm - remote control key not working.
Alarm signals...........................................
Reduced alarm level...............................
162
163
163
164
164
165
166
166
166
167
168
169
170
171
171
171
172
172
Active chassis - Four C*..........................
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC).....................................................
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - operation..................................
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages...........
Road Sign Information (RSI)*..................
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
Cruise control*........................................
Cruise control* - managing speed..........
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode..................................
Cruise control* - resume set speed........
Cruise control* - deactivate....................
Adaptive cruise control - ACC*...............
Adaptive cruise control* - function.........
Adaptive cruise control* - overview........
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed......................................................
Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval............................................................
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode............
06 06 07
152
152
153
154
155
155
156
156
157
158
159
160
160
161
161
162
174
174
175
176
177
177
179
180
180
181
182
182
182
183
185
186
187
187
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
Table of contents
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle........................................
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate......
Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue Assist
Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise
control functionality................................
Radar sensor...........................................
Radar sensor - limitations.......................
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action...............................................
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages................................................
Distance Warning*..................................
Distance Warning* - limitations...............
Distance Warning* - symbols and messages.......................................................
City Safety™...........................................
City Safety™ - function...........................
City Safety™ - operation........................
City Safety™ - limitations.......................
City Safety™ - laser sensor....................
City Safety™ - symbols and messages..
Collision warning system*.......................
Collision warning system* - function......
188
189
189
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection.......................................................... 209
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians............................................. 211
Collision warning system* - operation.... 212
Collision warning system* - general limitations..................................................... 213
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations.......................................... 215
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages................................................ 217
Driver Alert System*................................ 219
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*...................... 219
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation... 220
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages................................................ 221
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*............. 223
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function.......................................................... 223
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation.......................................................... 224
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations........................................................ 225
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols and messages................................. 226
Park Assist*............................................. 228
Park assist syst* - function.....................
Park assist syst* - backward..................
Park assist syst* - forward......................
Park assist syst* - fault indication...........
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors.
Park assist camera..................................
Park assist camera - settings.................
Park assist camera - limitations..............
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System)...
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) operation.................................................
BLIS - symbols and messages...............
Adjustable steering force*.......................
07 07 07
6
191
191
192
194
195
197
198
199
200
200
201
202
204
206
207
208
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
228
229
230
231
231
232
234
235
235
236
238
239
Table of contents
08 Starting and driving
Alcolock*.................................................
Alcolock* - functions and operation........
Alcolock* - storage..................................
Alcolock* - before starting the engine....
Alcolock* - to bear in mind.....................
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages.
Starting the engine..................................
Switching off the engine.........................
Steering lock...........................................
Remote start (ERS)*................................
Remote start (ERS) - operation...............
Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages.......................................................
Starting the engine – Flexifuel.................
Jump starting with battery......................
Gearboxes...............................................
Manual gearbox......................................
Gear shift indicator*................................
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*...........
Automatic gearbox -- Powershift*..........
Gear selector inhibitor.............................
Hill start assist (HSA)*.............................
Start/Stop*..............................................
Start/Stop* - function and operation.......
241
241
242
242
243
245
246
247
247
248
248
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop...
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts........
Start/Stop* - the engine does not autostart.........................................................
Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox.............................
Start/Stop* - settings..............................
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages.....
ECO*.......................................................
All Wheel Drive - AWD*...........................
Foot brake...............................................
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system....
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers.........
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance.......................................................
Parking brake..........................................
Fording....................................................
Overheating.............................................
Driving with open tailgate.......................
Overload - starter battery........................
Before a long journey..............................
Winter driving..........................................
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing.............
Fuel filler flap - manual opening..............
264
265
266
Filling up with fuel...................................
Fuel - handling........................................
Fuel - petrol.............................................
Fuel - diesel.............................................
Catalytic converters................................
Fuel - bioethanol E85..............................
Diesel particle filter (DPF)........................
Economical driving..................................
Driving with a trailer................................
Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox...
Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox
Towing bracket/Towbar..........................
Detachable towbar - storage..................
Detachable towbar - specifications........
Detachable towbar - attachment/
removal...................................................
Trailer stabiliser - TSA.............................
Towing....................................................
Towing eye..............................................
Recovery.................................................
282
283
284
284
285
286
287
287
288
290
290
291
291
291
08 08 08
250
251
252
253
253
254
255
258
260
261
261
262
266
267
268
270
272
272
273
273
274
275
279
279
280
280
281
281
282
282
292
294
295
297
298
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
7
Table of contents
09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - direction of rotation....................
Tyres - maintenance...............................
Tyres - tread wear indicators..................
Wheel bolts.............................................
Tools.......................................................
Jack*.......................................................
Winter tyres.............................................
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions...........
Tyres - dimensions..................................
Tyres - load index...................................
Tyres - speed ratings..............................
Changing wheels - removing wheels......
Changing wheels - fitting........................
Tyres - air pressure.................................
Warning triangle......................................
First aid kit*.............................................
Emergency puncture repair*...................
Emergency puncture repair kit* - location..........................................................
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview.........................................................
Emergency puncture repair* - operation.
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking...........................................................
10 Maintenance and service
300
300
302
302
302
303
303
304
304
305
305
306
308
309
310
311
311
Emergency puncture repair kit* - inflating
the tyres.................................................. 316
Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant 317
Volvo service programme....................... 319
Raising the car........................................ 320
Bonnet - opening and closing................. 322
Engine compartment - overview............. 322
Engine compartment - checking............. 324
Engine oil - general................................. 324
Engine oil - checking and filling.............. 325
Coolant - level......................................... 328
Brake and clutch fluid - level.................. 329
Power steering fluid - level...................... 330
Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair....................................................... 331
Lamp replacement.................................. 331
Lamp replacement - headlamps............. 332
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs................................. 333
Lamp replacement - dipped beam......... 333
Lamp replacement - main beam............. 334
Lamp replacement - extra main beam.... 334
Lamp replacement - direction indicators
front......................................................... 334
Lamp replacement - side marker lamps
front......................................................... 335
Lamp replacement - rear lamp............... 335
09 09 10
8
312
313
313
315
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Table of contents
11 Specifications
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps......................................................
Lamp replacement - number plate lighting...........................................................
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo
area.........................................................
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting...........................................................
Lamps - specifications ...........................
Wiper blades...........................................
Washer fluid - filling................................
Battery.....................................................
Battery - symbols....................................
Starter battery - replacement..................
Battery - Start/Stop.................................
Fuses - general.......................................
Fuses - in engine compartment..............
Fuses - under glovebox..........................
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox.................................................
Fuses - by instrument panel...................
Fuses - in cargo area..............................
Fuses - in the engine compartment's
cold zone................................................
Car washing............................................
336
337
Polishing and waxing..............................
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............
Rustproofing...........................................
Cleaning the interior................................
Paint damage..........................................
360
361
361
361
363
Type designations...................................
Dimensions.............................................
Weights...................................................
Towing capacity and towball load..........
Engine specifications..............................
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions...
Engine oil - grade and volume................
Coolant - grade and volume...................
Transmission fluid - grade and volume...
Brake fluid - grade and volume...............
Power steering fluid - grade....................
Washer fluid - quality and volume..........
Fuel tank - volume..................................
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions...
Tyres - approved tyre pressures.............
Electrical system.....................................
Starter battery - specification.................
Type approval - remote control key system..........................................................
Type approval - radar system.................
10 10 11
337
337
338
339
340
341
342
342
344
345
347
351
353
355
356
357
359
366
369
370
371
373
375
376
378
379
381
381
381
382
383
387
389
390
391
391
Type approval - Bluetooth®.................... 393
Licenses.................................................. 401
Symbols in the display............................ 403
9
Table of contents
12 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 406
12
10
Table of contents
11
INTRODUCTION
01 Introduction
Reading the owner's manual
A good way of getting to know your new car
is to read the owner's manual, ideally before
your first journey. This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions, to see how best to handle the car in different situations, and to make the best use of
all the car's features. Please pay attention to
the safety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illustrations in this owner's manual are not binding. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice.
©
Volvo Car Corporation
Digital owner's manual in the car1
When the printed manual refers to the digital
owner's manual it means the one shown on
the screen in the car.
Open the digital owner's manual - press the
MY CAR button in the centre console, press
OK/MENU and select Owner's manual.
There are four options for finding information
in the owner's manual:
• Search - Search function for finding an
article.
• Categories - All articles sorted into categories.
1
• Favourites - Quick access to favouritebookmarked articles.
• Quick Guide - A selection of articles for
common functions.
Special texts
01
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
NOTE
The owner's manual is not available while
driving.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
Options/accessories
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, the
owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories
(retrofitted extra equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's
manual is not available in all cars - they have
different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and
national or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the
text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are
used instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are highlighted in the owner's manual by means of
the text being slightly larger and printed in
grey. Examples of this are in menu texts and
message texts on the information display
(e.g. Audio settings).
Applies to certain car models.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
13
01 Introduction
01
||
Decals
Risk of property damage
Information
The car contains different types of decal
which are designed to convey important
information in a simple and clear manner. The
decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/
information.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
damage to property.
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
serious personal injury or fatality.
G031593
G031592
Warning for personal injury
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact
replicas of those in the car. They are
included to show their approximate
appearance and location in the car. The
information that applies to your particular
car is available on the respective decals
for your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the
owner's manual.
14
01 Introduction
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters
adjacent to the series of illustrations
where the order of the instructions is not
significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of
no relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
•
•
Coolant
Engine oil
Related information
Recording data
Related information refers to other sections
containing related information.
Certain information about the vehicle's operation and functionality, and any incidents, are
recorded in the car.
Images
The manual's images are sometimes schematic and may deviate from the car's appearance depending on equipment level and market.
To be continued
}} This symbol is located furthest down to
the right when an article continues on the following page.
Continued from previous page
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the
left when an article continues from the previous page.
Related information
•
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 20)
•
Information on the Internet (p. 17)
01
Your vehicle contains a number of computers
whose function is to continuously check and
monitor the vehicle's operation and functionality. Some of the computers can record
information during normal driving if they
detect an error. In addition, information is
recorded in the event of a collision or incident. Parts of the recorded information are
required so that technicians can diagnose
and rectify faults in the vehicle during servicing and maintenance and so that Volvo can
fulfil legal requirements and other regulations.
In addition to this, the information is used for
research purposes by Volvo in order to continually develop quality and safety, as the
information can contribute to a better understanding of the factors that cause accidents
and injuries. The information includes details
of the status and functionality of various systems and modules in the vehicle with regard
to engine, throttle, steering and brake systems, amongst other things. This information
may include details regarding the way the
driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle
speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not
the driver and passengers have used their
seatbelts. For the reasons given this information may be stored in the vehicle's computers
15
01 Introduction
01
for a certain length of time, but also as a
result of a collision or incident. This information may be stored by Volvo as long as it can
help to further develop and further enhance
safety and quality and as long as there are
legal requirements and other regulations that
Volvo needs to consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent.
However, due to national legislation and regulations Volvo may be required to disclose
such information to authorities such as police
authorities, or others who may assert a legal
right to have access to it.
To be able to read and interpret the information recorded by the computers in the vehicle
requires special technical equipment that
Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
is responsible that the information, which is
transferred to Volvo during servicing and
maintenance, is stored and handled in a
secure manner and that the handling complies with applicable legal requirements. For
further information - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car's electronic system.
Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. Volvo therefore recommends
that you always contact an authorised Volvo
workshop before installing accessories or
extra equipment which are connected to or
affect the electrical system.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions
16
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A
47 mm
B
87 mm
The windscreen is equipped with a heatreflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat
radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and
performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equipment, it should be positioned on the part of
the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film
(see the highlighted area in the above illustration).
01 Introduction
Change of ownership for cars with
Volvo On Call*
If the car is equipped with Volvo On Call, VOC
it is important to change the owner of the
service.
VOC is a supplemental service that consists
of safety, security and comfort services. In
the event of change of ownership it is important to change the owner of the service.
01
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further information concerning your car.
With a personal Volvo ID it is possible to log in
to My Volvo which is a personal web page for
you and your car.
Closing the VOC service
Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of change
of ownership in order to close the VOC service.
In the event of change of ownership it is
important to reset personal settings in the car
to the original factory settings2, see Change
of ownership.
Starting the VOC service
QR code
A QR code reader is required to read the QR
code, which is available as a supplemental
program (app) for several mobile phones. The
QR code reader can be downloaded from e.g.
App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
It is very important that the VOC service
changes owner so that the previous owner's
ability to use services in the car is stopped.
Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of a
change of ownership.
Related information
•
2
Information on the Internet (p. 17)
Only applies to cars that can be connected to the Internet.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
17
01 Introduction
01
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
tured in one of the cleanest and most
resource-efficient plants in the world.
G000000
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufac-
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which influence all
operations. We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufactured in one of the cleanest and most
resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo
Car Corporation has global ISO certification,
which includes the environmental standard
ISO 14001 covering all factories and several
of our other units. We also set requirements
18
for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower
fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel
consumption. For more information read
under the heading, Reducing environmental
impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the
concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept
that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are
well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
01 Introduction
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS*
(Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the
incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is monitored continuously and if there is an increase
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is
closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy
traffic, queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level
ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the
carbon filter.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact - here are a few tips:
•
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
the engine when stationary for longer
periods. Pay attention to local regulations.
•
•
Drive economically - think ahead.
•
If the car is equipped with an engine
block heater*, use it before starting from
cold - it improves starting capacity and
reduces wear in cold weather and the
engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly, which lowers consumption and reduces emissions.
•
High speed increases consumption considerably due to increased wind resistance - a doubling of speed increases
wind resistance 4 times.
•
Always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult
a workshop in the event of uncertainty
about how this type of waste should be
discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you contribute to
a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and
maintenance of your car it becomes part of
our system. Volvo makes clear demands
regarding the way in which our workshops
are designed in order to prevent spills and
discharges into the environment. Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools
Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved, and the car's
durability is extended. For more information
and further advice, see Eco guide (p. 59),
Economical driving (p. 287) and Fuel consumption (p. 383).
required to guarantee good environmental
care.
Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's
instructions - follow the intervals recommended in the Service and Warranty
Booklet.
01
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
referral to a certified/approved recycling
facility.
Related information
•
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 20)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
19
01 Introduction
01
The owner's manual and the
environment
The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual
comes from FSC® certified forests or other
controlled sources.
The Forest Stewardship Council® symbol
shows that the paper pulp in a printed
owner's manual comes from FSC® certified
forests or other controlled sources.
Laminated glass
Laminated glass
The glass is reinforced which provides better protection against
break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. The windscreen and the side windows*
have laminated glass.
Related information
•
20
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy (p.
18)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
SAFETY
02 Safety
General information on seatbelts
02
Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that
all passengers are using their seatbelts during
the journey.
•
The hip strap must be positioned low
down (not over the abdomen).
•
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards
the shoulder.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against
the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back.
The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten (p. 23) their seatbelt by means of an
audio and visual reminder (p. 24).
Remember
22
•
Do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.
•
The seatbelt must not be twisted or
caught on anything.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo workshop.
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced.
Some of the protective characteristics of
the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it
appears to be undamaged. In addition,
replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or
damaged. The new seatbelt must be typeapproved and intended for installation in
the same position as the replaced seatbelt.
Related information
•
•
•
Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 23)
Seat belt - loosening (p. 23)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 25)
02 Safety
Seatbelt - putting on
Seat belt - loosening
Seatbelt - pregnancy
Put on the seatbelt (p. 22) before setting off.
Loosen the seatbelt (p. 22) when the car is
stationary.
Seatbelt (p. 22) must always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in
the correct way.
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by
pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt
buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt
has locked.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the
rear seat1.
Remember
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
Related information
•
•
Seatbelt - putting on (p. 23)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 24)
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Related information
•
•
•
•
02
Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 23)
Seat belt - loosening (p. 23)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 25)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 24)
G020998
•
•
•
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle
and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt
does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so
that it does not hang loose.
The diagonal section should wrap over the
shoulder then be routed between the breasts
and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and
ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat (p. 68) and steering wheel (p. 74) such that they can easily
maintain control of the vehicle as they drive
1
Certain markets.
23
02 Safety
02
||
(which means that they must be able to easily
operate the foot pedals and steering wheel).
The aim should be to position the seat with as
large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel.
Seatbelt reminder
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their (p. 23) seatbelt by means of an audio
and visual reminder.
Related information
Seatbelt - putting on (p. 23)
Seat belt - loosening (p. 23)
G017726
•
•
The audio reminder is speed dependent, and
in some cases time dependent. The visual
reminder is located in the roof console and in
the combined instrument panel (p. 55).
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
24
Provides information on which seatbelts
(p. 22) are being used in the rear seat. A
message appears in the combined instrument panel when the seatbelts are in use,
or if one of the rear doors has been
opened. The message is cleared auto-
matically after driving for approximately
30 seconds or after pressing the indicator
stalk (p. 100) OK button.
•
Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during travel. This
warning takes the form of a message in
the combined instrument panel along with
the audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can
also be acknowledged manually by
pressing the OK button.
The message in the combined instrument
panel showing which seatbelts are in use is
always shown. Press the OK button to see
stored messages.
Certain markets
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
the driver and front seat passenger to use a
seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.
At low speed, the audible reminder will sound
for the first 6 seconds.
02 Safety
Seatbelt tensioner
Safety - warning symbol
All the seatbelts (p. 22) are equipped with belt
tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a
sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then
provides more effective restraint for the occupants.
The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
detected during fault tracing or if a system
has been activated. Where required, the
warning symbol is shown together with a
message in the combined instrument panel
(p. 55) information display.
02
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's
side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do
not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle.
The seatbelts and buckles would then
possibly not function as intended in the
event of a collision. There is a risk of
serous injury.
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag system in the digital combined instrument
panel.
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag system (p. 26) in the analogue combined
instrument panel.
The warning symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates when the remote control key is in key position II (p. 67). The symbol is extinguished after approx. 6 seconds
provided the airbag system is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The
symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or
some other fault in the system. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and SRS airbag
25
02 Safety
||
Service required or SRS airbag Service
urgent appears in the display. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop immediately.
02
Airbag system
In the event of a frontal collision the airbag
system helps to protect the driver and passenger from injuries to head, face and chest.
Related information
•
General information on safety mode (p.
35)
The system consists of airbags and sensors.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated and become
hot. To cushion the impact, the airbag
deflates when compressed. When this
occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is
completely normal. The entire process,
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second.
WARNING
G018665
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
Airbag system, left-hand drive car.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending
on the nature of the collision and whether
or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies
to all belt positions.
G018666
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the
collision on the vehicle and the action is
adapted accordingly so that one or more
airbags are deployed.
Airbag system, right-hand drive car.
26
Related information
•
•
•
Driver airbag (p. 27)
Passenger airbag (p. 27)
Safety - warning symbol (p. 25)
02 Safety
Driver airbag
Passenger airbag
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 22) the car is equipped on the
driver's side with an airbag (p. 26).
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 22) on the passenger side, the car
is equipped with an airbag (p. 26).
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
AIRBAG.
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is
marked AIRBAG.
02
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a righthand drive car.
WARNING
Related information
•
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
Passenger airbag (p. 27)
Location of the front passenger airbag in a lefthand drive car.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts
must be secured.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
27
02 Safety
||
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated.
02
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
Switch - PACOS*
The front passenger airbag can be deactivated (p. 28) if the car is equipped with a
switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch).
Passenger airbag - activating/
deactivating*
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
Front passenger airbag (p. 27) can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
Switch - PACOS
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open.
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Check that the switch is in the required position. The remote control key's key blade (p.
156) should be used to change position.
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger
seat when the airbag is activated. This
applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but does not have a PACOS
switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch),
then the airbag will always be activated.
NOTE
Related information
•
•
28
Driver airbag (p. 27)
Child seats (p. 38)
WARNING
Location of airbag label plus switch.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
When the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 67) the warning symbol (p.
25) for the airbag is shown in the combined instrument panel for
approx. 6 seconds.
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
02 Safety
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger the lives of passengers in
the car.
2
02
Related information
G017800
2
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated.
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indicates that the airbag for the front passenger
seat is activated (see preceding illustration).
A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding
illustration).
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol
in
the roof console is illuminated. Failure to
follow this advice could endanger the life
of the child.
Child seats (p. 38)
G017724
•
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger seat if the message in the roof console indicates that the airbag is deactivated, and if the warning symbol(p. 25) for
the airbag system is also displayed on the
combined instrument panel. This indicates
that there has been a severe malfunction.
Visit a workshop as soon as possible.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
29
02 Safety
Side airbag (SIPS)
02
WARNING
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams,
pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important
part of the SIPS.
•
Volvo recommends that repairs are
only carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPSbag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by
the side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
•
Side airbags are a supplement the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
G032949
Related information
The SIPS bag system consists of two main
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat
backrests.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
30
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
•
•
•
Passenger airbag (p. 27)
•
Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 31)
Driver airbag (p. 27)
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion (p. 31)
02 Safety
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag (p. 30).
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
WARNING
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
driver and passengers from striking their
heads on the inside of the car during a collision.
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended
protection. Volvo recommends that you
only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 38) can be
placed on the front passenger seat provided
that the car does not have an activated airbag
(p. 28) on the front passenger side.
Related information
•
•
02
Passenger airbag (p. 27)
WARNING
General information on child safety (p.
37)
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm
under the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
Inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part
of the SIPS system (p. 30) and the airbag system (p. 26). It is fitted in the headlining along
both sides of the roof and protects the car's
occupants sitting in the outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and
the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
•
General information on seatbelts (p. 22)
31
02 Safety
General information on WHIPS
(whiplash protection)
02
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a protection against whiplash injuries. The system
consists of energy absorbing backrests and
specially designed head restraints in the front
seats.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the
front seat backrests are lowered backward to
alter the seating position of the driver and
front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of
whiplash injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
•
•
The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the
collision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.
32
WHIPS - child seats (p. 33)
WHIPS - seating position (p. 33)
General information on seatbelts (p. 22)
02 Safety
WHIPS - child seats
WHIPS - seating position
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system (p.
32).
For optimum protection from the WHIPS system (p. 32) the driver and passenger must
have the correct seating position and make
sure that the system's function is not obstructed.
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 38) can be
placed on the front passenger seat provided
that the car does not have an activated airbag
(p. 28) on the front passenger side.
Related information
•
General information on child safety (p.
37)
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
02
Seating position
Set the correct seating position in the front
seat (p. 68) before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in
the centre of the seat with as little space as
possible between the head and the head
restraint.
Function
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may
prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the
folded backrest.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
33
02 Safety
WARNING
02
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked.
Volvo recommends that it is checked by
an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the
system checked even after a minor rearend collision.
When the systems deploy
In the event of a collision Volvo's different
personal safety systems work together in
order to minimise injury.
System
Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 25) front
seat
In the event of a
frontal collision,
and/or side-impact
collision, and/or
rear-end collision
and/or overturning
Seatbelt tensioner,
rear seat
In a frontal collision
and/or side-impact
accident and/or
overturning
Airbags
Triggered
Inflatable Curtain
IC (p. 31)
In the event of a
side-impact collision
and/or certain frontal
collisionsA
Whiplash protection WHIPS (p. 32)
In a rear-end collision
A
In a side-impact
accidentA
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a
collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors
such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed
of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the
different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags (p. 26) have deployed, the following is recommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
In a frontal collisionA
(Steering wheel(p.
27) and passenger
airbag (p. 27))
Side airbags
(SIPS) (p. 30)
System
NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
deployed only once during a collision.
34
02 Safety
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre
console is drenched with water or other
liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do
not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car.
Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
General information on safety mode
Safety mode is a protective state that is
enforced when the collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions such as,
for example, the fuel lines, sensors for one of
the safety systems, or the brake system.
02
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The
smoke and dust created when the airbags
are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case
of irritation, wash with cold water. The
rapid deployment sequence and airbag
fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
Warning triangle in the digital combined instrument panel.
Warning triangle in the analogue combined
instrument panel.
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See manual may appear in the
combined instrument panel (p. 55) information display. This means that the car has
reduced functionality.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset
the electronics yourself if the car has been
in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as
normal. Volvo recommends that you
engage an authorised Volvo workshop to
check and restore the car to normal status
after Safety mode See manual has been
displayed.
35
02 Safety
||
Related information
02
•
Safety mode - attempting to start the car
(p. 36)
•
Safety mode - moving the car (p. 37)
Safety mode - attempting to start the
car
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when
the Safety mode See manual message
is displayed. Leave the car at once.
If the car is set in safety mode (p. 35) then an
attempt to start the car can be made if everything seems normal and the absence of fuel
leakage has been checked.
WARNING
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the
car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its
location. Volvo recommends that it is
transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to
the effect that the ignition is on, press the
start button. Then close the door and reinsert
the remote control key. The car's electronics
will now try to reset themselves to normal
mode. Then try to start the car.
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must
not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery
service (p. 298) used instead. Even if the car
appears to be driveable, hidden damage may
make the car impossible to control once moving.
36
Related information
•
Safety mode - moving the car (p. 37)
02 Safety
Safety mode - moving the car
General information on child safety
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset after attempting
to start the car (p. 36) , the car can be moved
carefully out of a dangerous position.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a
child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
Related information
•
General information on safety mode (p.
35)
Volvo recommends that children travel in
rear-facing child seats until as late an age as
possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and
then front-facing booster cushions/child seats
until up to 10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the
choice of equipment are dictated by the
child's weight and size; see Child seats (p.
38).
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
02
Child safety locks
The rear doors and rear door windows* can
be blocked manually (p. 168) or electronically
(p. 169)* from opening from the inside.
Related information
•
•
•
NOTE
Child seats - location (p. 43)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 43)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p.
47)
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices)
which is designed for your particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your
child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore,
the child safety equipment fits and is easy to
use.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
37
02 Safety
Child seats
02
NOTE
Children should sit comfortably and safely.
Make sure that the child seat is being used
correctly.
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat
to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
springs or the rails and beams under the
seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
G020739
Look in the installation instructions for the
child seat for the correct fitting.
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
38
02 Safety
Recommended child seats2
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Group 0
Group 0+
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
02
Type approval: E1 04301146
max 13 kg
max 10 kg
Centre rear seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture
system.
max 10 kg
Group 0
Outer rear seat
(L)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing
child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and
straps.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat)
- rear-facing child seat, secured
with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
(L)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(L)
Group 0
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
max 10 kg
(U)
(U)
Group 0+
(U)
max 13 kg
2
With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
}}
39
02 Safety
||
02
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Group 1
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and
straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
9-18 kg
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Group 1
Centre rear seat
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing
child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and
straps. Use a protective cushion between the
child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat)
- rear-facing child seat, secured
with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Use a protective cushion between
the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, secured
with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps.
9-18 kg
Type approval: E5 03171
(L)
40
Group 1
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
9-18 kg
(U)
(U)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
02 Safety
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Group 2
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and
straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
15-25 kg
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
(U)
Booster cushion with and without backrest
(Booster Cushion with and without
backrest).
Booster cushion with and without backrest
(Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
(UF)
02
Type approval: E5 04192
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04216
Centre rear seat
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child
seat (Volvo Convertible Child
Seat) - front-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with
and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
}}
41
02 Safety
||
02
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Group 2/3
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster
Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
Type approval: E1 04301169
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with
backrest).
(UF)
(UF)
15-36 kg
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
Related information
•
•
•
•
42
Child seats - location (p. 43)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p.
47)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 43)
General information on child safety (p. 37)
02 Safety
Child seats - location
WARNING
Always fit child seats/booster cushions (p. 38)
in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated (p. 28). If a child is sitting on the front
passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could
rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause
the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Child seat - ISOFIX
ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats
(p. 38) that is based on an international standard.
02
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Related information
The label for the airbag becomes visible when
the passenger door is opened, see illustration (p.
28).
•
•
General information on child safety (p. 37)
•
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 43)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p.
47)
You may place:
•
a child seat/booster cushion on the front
passenger seat provided there is no activated airbag on the front passenger side.
•
one or more child seats/booster cushions
in the rear seat.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery
(see preceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
43
02 Safety
||
Related information
02
•
•
•
ISOFIX - size classes (p. 44)
ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 45)
General information on child safety (p. 37)
ISOFIX - size classes
There is a size classification for child seats
using the ISOFIX (p. 43) fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
type of child seat (p. 45).
Size
class
44
Description
A
Full size, front-facing child
seat
B
Reduced size (alt. 1), frontfacing child seat
B1
Reduced size (alt.2), front-facing child seat
C
Full size, rear-facing child seat
D
Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
F
Transverse infant seat, lefthand
G
Transverse infant seat, righthand
WARNING
Never place the child in the passenger
seat if the car is fitted with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on
the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
02 Safety
ISOFIX - types of child seat
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
Type of child seat
Infant seat transverse
Infant seat, rear-facing
Weight
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Size class
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
max 10 kg
F
X
X
(0 – 9 months)
G
X
X
max 10 kg
E
X
OK
(0 – 9 months)
Infant seat, rear-facing
max 13 kg
02
(IL)
E
X
(0 – 12 months)
OK
(IL)
D
X
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing
9-18 kg
D
X
(9-36 months)
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
}}
45
02 Safety
||
Type of child seat
Front-facing child seat
02
Weight
9-18 kg
Size class
B
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
X
OKA
(9-36 months)
(IUF)
B1
X
OKA
(IUF)
A
X
OKA
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Make sure you select the right size class (p.
44) of child seat with ISOFIX (p. 43) fixture
system.
46
02 Safety
Child seats - upper mounting points
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for child seats (p. 38). These mounting
points are located on the parcel shelf and are
concealed by plastic covers. Bend aside the
plastic covers to access each respective
mounting point.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head
restraint leg before they are tensioned at
the attachment point.
02
Related information
•
•
•
General information on child safety (p. 37)
Child seats - location (p. 43)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 43)
For cars with folding head restraints on the
outside seats, the head restraints should be
folded to facilitate installation.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats for as long as
possible.
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.
47
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
03 Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
03
}}
49
03 Instruments and controls
||
Overview, left-hand drive car
03
50
03 Instruments and controls
Function
See
Function
See
Function
See
Menus and messages, direction
indicators, main/
dipped beam, trip
computer
(p. 100), (p.
102), (p. 84),
(p. 79) and
(p. 112).
Hazard warning
flashers
(p. 83).
Seat adjustment*
(p. 69).
Door handle
–
Control panel
(p. 75), (p.
282) and (p.
166).
Manual gear changing in an automatic
gearbox*
(p. 255).
(p. 165), (p.
169), (p. 92)
and (p. 94).
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler
flap and boot lid
Cruise control*
(p. 180) and
(p. 182).
Horn, airbags
(p. 74) and
(p. 26).
Combined instrument panel
(p. 55).
Menu navigation,
audio control,
phone control*
Control panel for
infotainment system
and menu navigation
(p. 103) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Control panel for climate control
(p. 121).
Gear selector
(p. 103) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
(p. 253), (p.
255) or (p.
258).
Controls for active
chassis (Four-C)*
(p. 174).
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 246).
Wipers and washing
(p. 91).
Ignition switch
(p. 66).
Steering wheel
adjustment
(p. 74).
Screen for infotainment system and
display of menus
(p. 103) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Parking brake
(p. 275).
Bonnet opener
(p. 322).
Related information
•
•
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 63)
03
Trip meter (p. 64)
Clock (p. 64)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
51
03 Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls, right-hand
drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
03
52
03 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
03
}}
53
03 Instruments and controls
||
03
54
Function
See
Function
See
Function
See
Hazard warning
flashers
(p. 83).
(p. 121).
(p. 103) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
(p. 75), (p.
282) and (p.
166).
Control panel for climate control
Screen for infotainment system and
display of menus
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler
flap and boot lid
Door handle
–
Control panel
(p. 103) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 246).
(p. 165), (p.
169), (p. 92)
and (p. 94).
Control panel for
infotainment system
and menu navigation
Ignition switch
(p. 66).
Manual gear changing in an automatic
gearbox*
(p. 255).
Cruise control*
(p. 180) and
(p. 182).
Combined instrument panel
(p. 55).
Horn, airbags
(p. 74) and
(p. 26).
Menu navigation,
audio control,
phone control*
(p. 103) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Wipers and washing
(p. 91).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seat adjustment*
(p. 69).
Bonnet opener
(p. 322).
Parking brake
(p. 275).
Steering wheel
adjustment
(p. 74).
Menus and messages, direction
indicators, main/
dipped beam, trip
computer
(p. 100), (p.
102), (p. 84),
(p. 79) and
(p. 112).
Controls for active
chassis (Four-C)*
(p. 174).
Gear selector
(p. 253), (p.
255) or (p.
258).
Related information
•
•
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 63)
Trip meter (p. 64)
Clock (p. 64)
03 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, as well as messages.
•
Analogue combined instrument panel overview (p. 55)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 56)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 60)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 61)
Analogue combined instrument panel
- overview
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text.
Information display
03
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer supplementary information (p. 112) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 282).
Information display, analogue instrument panel.
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text. There
are further descriptions under the functions
that use the display.
1
Gauges and indicators
Eco meter The meter provides an indication of how economically the car is being
driven. The higher the reading on the
scale, the more economical it is.
Speedometer
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
55
03 Instruments and controls
||
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator2/Gear position indicator3 See also Gear shift indicator* (p.
254), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*
(p. 255) or Automatic gearbox -Powershift* (p. 258).
03
Indicator and warning symbols
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
symbols in the centre of the information display, illuminate in key position II or when the
engine is started. When the engine has
started, all the symbols should go out except
the parking brake symbol, which only goes
out when the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II
then all symbols go out within a few seconds
except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Digital combined instrument panel overview
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text.
Information display
Related information
•
•
•
Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instrument panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
warning symbols4
2
3
4
56
Combined instrument panel (p. 55)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 60)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 61)
Information display, digital instrument panel*.
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text. There
are further descriptions under the functions
that use the display.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 325).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Gauges and indicators, digital
instrument panel
(p. 255) or Automatic gearbox -Powershift* (p. 258).
Alternative themes can be selected for the
digital combined instrument panel. Possible
themes are "Elegance", "Eco" and
"Performance". The setting for the theme can
be stored in the remote control key's memory
when locking the car; see pages Remote control key with key blade (p. 150) and MY CAR
(p. 103).
A theme can only be selected when the
engine is running.
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk
switch's OK button and then select the
Themes menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the lever. Confirm your choice by
pressing the OK button. For more information
on menus, see Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel (p. 100).
03
Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer supplementary information (p. 112) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 282).
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7 See also Gear shift indicator* (p.
254), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*
5
6
7
Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer supplementary information (p. 112) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 282).
Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power
guide* (p. 59).
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p.
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
57
03 Instruments and controls
||
254), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*
(p. 255) or Automatic gearbox -Powershift* (p. 258).
Power guide. See also Eco guide &
Power guide* (p. 59).
Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p.
254), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*
(p. 255) or Automatic gearbox -Powershift* (p. 258).
Indicator and warning symbols
03
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
•
Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument
panel.
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
6
7
8
58
If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II
then all symbols go out within a few seconds
except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.
•
•
Speedometer
5
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
symbols in the centre of the information display, illuminate in key position II or when the
engine is started. When the engine has
started, all the symbols should go out except
the parking brake symbol, which only goes
out when the brake is disengaged.
Related information
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer supplementary information (p. 112) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 282).
Functionality check
Combined instrument panel (p. 55)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 60)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 61)
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
warning symbols8
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 325).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Eco guide & Power guide*
Instantaneous value
Eco guide and Power guide are two combined instrument panel (p. 55) instruments
which help the driver to drive the car with
optimum driving economy.
The instantaneous value is shown here - the
higher the reading on the scale, the better.
The car also stores statistics of journeys
made, which can be viewed in the form of a
block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 113).
Eco guide
This instrument provides an indication of how
economically the car is being driven.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco";
see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 56).
Instantaneous value
The instantaneous value is calculated based
on speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus use of the foot brake.
Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low engine
speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall during acceleration and braking.
Very low instantaneous values illuminate the
red zone on the meter (with a short delay),
which means poor driving economy and
hence should be avoided.
Average value
The average value slowly follows the instantaneous value and describes how the car has
been driven most recently. The higher the
pointers on the scale, the better the economy
achieved by the driver.
03
Available engine power
Engine power utilised
Available engine power
The smaller, upper pointer shows the available engine power9. The higher the reading on
the scale, the more power is available in the
current gear.
Power guide
Engine power utilised
This instrument shows the relationship
between how much power (Power) is being
taken from the engine and how much power
is available.
The larger, lower pointer shows the engine
power utilised9. The higher the reading on the
scale, the more power is being taken from the
engine.
To view this function, select the theme
"Performance"; see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 56).
A large gap between the two pointers indicates a large power reserve.
Average value
9
Power is dependent on engine speed.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
59
03 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel meaning of indicator symbols
Symbol
Right-hand direction indicator
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a
function is activated, that the system is operating, or that an error or failure has occurred.
Eco-function on, see ECO* (p.
270)
Indicator symbols
Symbol
03
Start/Stop, the engine autostopped; see Start/Stop* function and operation (p. 262)
Specification
ABL fault
Not used
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
Specification
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Stability system, sport mode
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
Main beam On
Left-hand direction indicator
60
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog
lamp is switched on.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system.
Stability system, sport mode
If the symbol illuminates after the engine has
been started then it may be due to a fault in
the car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that
you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Sport mode allows for a more active driving
experience. The system then detects whether
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in
normal driving and then allows controlled
skidding of the rear section up to a certain
level before it intervenes and stabilises the
car.
ABS fault
Engine preheater (diesel)
If this symbol illuminates then the system is
not working. The car's regular brake system
continues to work, but without the ABS function.
This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating mostly takes place due to
low temperature.
Emissions system
Stability system
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
a workshop to have the ABS system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off
the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
03 Instruments and controls
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not
behave as intended, this information symbol
illuminates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared with
the OK button, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 100), or it disappears automatically after a time (time
depending on which function is indicated).
The information symbol can also illuminate in
conjunction with other symbols.
Related information
•
•
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 55)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 61)
Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 56)
Combined instrument cluster meaning of warning symbols
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated, or that a serious error or a serious failure has occurred.
Warning symbols
Symbol
Specification
Low oil pressureA
Parking brake applied, digital
instrument
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the
symbol and message are cleared using the
OK button, or disappear automatically
after a time.
Parking brake applied, analogue instrument
Airbags – SRS
Main beam On
Seatbelt reminder
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash.
Alternator not charging
Left/right-hand direction indicator
Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
Fault in brake system
Eco function on
Warning
The symbol illuminates when the Eco function
is activated.
Start/Stop
The symbol shines when the engine is autostopped.
03
A
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure
is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 325).
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then
the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the
61
03 Instruments and controls
||
engine immediately and check the engine oil
level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Parking brake applied
03
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol flashes during application, and then
changes over to a constant glow.
A flashing symbol in any other situation
means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.
For more information, see Parking brake (p.
275).
Airbags – SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means a fault has been
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
to have the system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat
has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in
a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
62
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a
fault has occurred in the electrical system.
Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p.
329).
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at
the same time, there may be a fault in the
brake force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off
the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
•
If both symbols extinguish, continue
driving.
•
If the symbols remain illuminated,
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see Brake and clutch fluid - level
(p. 329). If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great
care, to a workshop to have the brake
system checked. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop. Volvo recommends
that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at
the same time, there is a risk that the rear
end will skid during heavy braking.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect
the safety and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the information
display at the same time. The symbol remains
visible until the fault has been rectified but the
text message can be cleared with the OK
button; see Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel (p. 100). The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
03 Instruments and controls
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display.
Clear the message using the OK button.
Related information
Reminder – doors not closed
•
If one of the doors is not closed properly then
the information or warning symbol illuminates
together with an explanatory image in the
information display. Stop the car in a safe
place as soon as possible and close the door
that is open.
•
•
Outside temperature gauge
Combined instrument panel (p. 55)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 60)
The display for the outside temperature gauge
appears in the combined instrument panel.
Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 56)
03
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 7 km/h then the information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet10 is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display.
Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the bonnet.
If the boot lid is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with
an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
possible and close the boot lid.
10
Display for outside temperature gauge,
digital instrument panel
Display for outside temperature gauge,
analogue instrument panel
When the temperature lies between +2 °C to
-5 °C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the
display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has
been stationary then the gauge may show a
reading that is too high.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 55)
Only cars with alarm*.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
63
03 Instruments and controls
Trip meter
Clock
The trip meter display appears in the combined instrument panel.
The digital clock display appears in the combined instrument panel. Executive also
includes an analogue clock in the instrument
panel.
03
Clock, digital instrument panel.
Display for showing the time12
Trip meter, digital instrument.
Display for trip
meter11
The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for
measuring short distances. The distance is
shown in the display.
Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show
the required meter.
A long press (until the change occurs) on the
left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets
the trip meter shown. For more information,
see Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 112).
Related information
•
11
64
Combined instrument panel (p. 55)
Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.
Set the clock
The clock can be adjusted in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).
03 Instruments and controls
Analogue clock - Executive
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 55)
Volvo Sensus
Volvo Sensus is the heart of your personal
Volvo experience. It is Sensus that provides
information, entertainment and functions to
simplify your ownership.
03
Analogue clock.
Button for setting indicator backwards in
time.
Button for setting indicator forwards in
time.
The analogue clock is located in the instrument panel above the glovebox.
To set the time:
–
12
Use the appropriate button to move the
indicators either forward or back in time.
Setting can be made by means of two
methods:
•
Hold the button depressed - the indicator is first moved slowly in time,
equivalent to about 5 minutes, then
faster. Release the button when the
clock shows the correct time.
•
Press the button again - the indicator
is moved about 10 seconds in time.
When you are sitting in your car you want
control, and in today's interconnected world,
this includes information, communication and
entertainment when it is most suitable for
you. Sensus covers all our solutions that enable connection* to the outside world, at the
same time providing you with intuitive control
over all the car's capabilities.
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many
functions in several of the car's systems on
the centre console's display screen. With
Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by
means of an intuitive user interface. Settings
can be made in Car settings, Audio and
media, Climate control, etc.
The time is shown in the centre of an analogue instrument panel.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
65
03 Instruments and controls
||
With the centre console buttons and controls
or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*
functions can be activated or deactivated and
many different settings can be made.
buttons both vary, depending on the equipment
selected and the market.
Navigation* - NAV, see separate supplement.
Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*,
see separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
With a press on MY CAR all settings related
to the driving and control of the car are presented, such as City Safety, locks and alarm,
automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.
03
Car settings - MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
103).
With a press on the respective function
*, NAV* and CAM*
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*,
other sources, systems and functions can be
activated, e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
For more information about all functions/
systems, see the relevant section in the
owner's manual or its supplement.
Overview
Key positions
The remote control key can be used to set the
vehicle's electrical system in different modes/
levels so that different functions are available;
see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 67).
Internet-connected car *, see separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
Climate control system (p. 115).
Park assist camera (p. 232) – CAM*.
Related information
•
Licenses (p. 401)
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the Keyless* function the
remote control key does not need to be
inserted into the ignition switch but can be
stored in e.g. a pocket. For more information on Keyless functions, see Keyless
drive* (p. 159).
Insert the remote control key
Centre console control panel. The figure is schematic - the number of functions and layout of the
66
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
1. Hold the end of the remote control key
with the detachable key blade and insert
03 Instruments and controls
the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
2. Then press the remote control key in the
lock up to its end position.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can
impair the function or destroy the lock.
Do not press in the remote control key
incorrectly turned - hold the end with the
detachable key blade, see Detachable key
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 156).
Key positions - functions at different
levels
In order to enable the use of a limited number
of functions with the engine switched off, the
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the
remote control key. Throughout this owner's
manual these levels are described using the
denomination "key positions".
The following table shows the functions available in each key position/level.
Level
0
Functions
•
Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated.
•
•
Power seats can be adjusted.
I
•
Sunroof, power windows, 12V
socket in the passenger compartment, navigation, phone,
ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.
II
•
•
The headlamps come on.
•
Several other systems are
activated. However, heating in
seat cushions and the rear
window can only be activated
after the engine has been
started.
Remove the remote control key
Push the remote control key, allow it to eject,
then pull it out from the ignition switch.
The audio system can be
used for a limited time - see
the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
03
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds.
This key position consumes a
lot of current from the battery
and should therefore be avoided!
67
03 Instruments and controls
||
Choosing key position/level
•
Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This
means that the car's electrical system is
at level 0.
•
Key position I - With the remote control
key fully inserted into the ignition switch13
- Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.
Towing
Seats, front
For important information about the remote
control key during towing, see Towing (p.
295).
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort.
Related information
•
Key positions (p. 66)
NOTE
03
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
pedal when these key positions are due to
be selected.
•
•
Key position II - With the remote control
key fully inserted into the ignition switch13
- Give a long14 press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
Back to key position 0 - To return to key
position 0 from position II and I - Briefly
press on START/STOP ENGINE.
Audio system
For information on audio system functions
with remote control key removed, see the
Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to
adjust the distance to the steering wheel
and pedals. Check that the seat is locked
after changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Starting and stopping the engine
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
For information about starting/stopping the
engine, see Starting the engine (p. 246).
Control panel for power seat*.
13
14
15
68
Lumbar support adjustment, turn the
wheel15.
Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function.
Approx. 2 seconds.
Also applies to power seat.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
WARNING
Raising takes place in reverse order.
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving.
Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the
event of sudden braking or an accident.
Lowering the front seat backrest*
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possible.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it
is properly locked after being folded up in
order to avoid personal injury in the event
of sudden braking or an accident.
Related information
•
Seats, front - electrically operated (p.
69)
•
Seats, rear (p. 71)
Seats, front - electrically operated
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort. The
power seat can be moved forward/backward
and up/down. The front edge of the seat
cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest
angle can be changed.
Power seat*
03
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Backrest rake
The power front seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, go to key position I or
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the
seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
69
03 Instruments and controls
||
Preparations
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote control key without the key in the ignition switch.
Seat adjustment is normally made in key
position I and can always be made when the
engine is running.
03
Seat with memory function*
2. Hold the button depressed to store settings while depressing one of the memory
buttons.
Using a stored setting
Key memory* in remote control key16
All remote control keys can be used by different drivers to store the settings for the driver's
seat and door mirrors17.
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you
release the button then the movement of the
seat will stop.
Heated/ventilated seats*
For heated/ventilated seats, see Heated front
seats* (p. 122) and Heated rear seat* (p.
122).
Related information
•
•
Seats, front (p. 68)
Seats, rear (p. 71)
Proceed as follows in order to store the settings and use the key memory:
The memory function stores settings for the
seat and the door mirrors.
•
•
Adjust the seat as you want it.
•
Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock
button on the same remote control key)
and open the driver's door. The driver's
seat and door mirrors will automatically
adopt the positions that are stored in the
remote control key's memory (if the seat
has been moved since you locked the
car).
Store setting
Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
70
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lock the car by pressing the lock button
on the remote control key that you normally use. This stores the positions of the
seat and door mirrors in the remote control key's memory18.
03 Instruments and controls
The key memory can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 103).
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the setting buttons for the seat or
memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
Seats, rear
The rear seat backrest and the outer seat
head restraints can be folded. The centre seat
head restraint can be adjusted to suit the
height of the passenger.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down.
The seat belts must not be connected
either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.
WARNING
The backrest is in two parts. The parts can be
folded forward, together or separately.
1. Pull the handle(s).
2. Fold the backrest forward. Lower the
centre head restraint fully if the backrest's
wide section shall be lowered.
WARNING
Take hold of the backrests and make sure
they are locked properly after opening
them out in order to prevent injury under
hard braking or in the event of an accident.
03
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
do not play with the controls. Check that
there are no objects in front of, behind or
under the seat during adjustment. Ensure
that none of the rear seat passengers is in
danger of becoming trapped.
Related information
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 152)
The head restraint can be adjusted vertically
to suit the height of the passenger. The upper
16
17
18
For key memory for Keyless function, see Keyless drive* - key memory (p. 163).
Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
71
03 Instruments and controls
||
edge of the head restraint should be aligned
with middle of the back of the head. Slide it
up as required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
by the left-hand shaft must be pressed in
while the head restraint is pressed down
carefully.
03
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if
there are any passengers using of the
outer seats.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
Seats - Executive
The car's front seats have a control panel for
massage and lumbar. The passenger seat can
be adjusted front - rear.
Comfort seats, front
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked
position after being raised.
Related information
Seats, front (p. 68)
Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 69)
G030131
•
•
Adjusting the seat, front - rear.
Control panel for massage and lumbar.
1. The remote control key must be in key
position II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer
head restraints to improve rearward visibility.
72
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Massage
Setting lumbar
Adjusting the seat, front - rear
Button for activating massage.
Hard massage
Soft massage
Each front seat has massage in the backrest.
The massage is performed by air cushions
that can massage with either a hard or soft
setting. When one of the settings is selected
the massage is carried out in accordance
with the cycle: massage 6 minutes - pause 4
minutes - massage 6 minutes etc.
When the button is in the centre position, or
when the remote control key is in position 0,
massage is not activated.
Button for setting lumbar.
The lumbar support is set with the same air
cushions used for massage. Adjustment can
be made steplessly both in terms of depth
and height using the control button, see the
illustration above.
Lumbar support can be set when massage is
not active.
G030137
G030227
G030132
03
The illustration above shows a left-hand drive
car.
The passenger seat can be adjusted front rear. The seat can be moved forward or backward as long as the front or rear part of the
button respectively is held depressed, see
illustration above. The angle of the backrest is
not changed.
A memory function recalls the lumbar setting
when massage is stopped or when the pressure in the air cushions has decreased, e.g.
after a longer period of parking.
73
03 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions and has controls for horn and
cruise control, as well as menu, audio and
phone control.
Adjusting
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press
the steering wheel lightly at the same time
as you push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away.
Paddle for manual gear changing in an
automatic gearbox, see Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 255)
Audio and phone control, see separate
Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Horn
03
With speed related power steering* the level
of steering force can be adjusted, see Adjustable steering force* (p. 239).
G021138
Keypads* and paddles*
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Horn.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Possible steering wheel positions
Related information
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
•
Keypads and paddles in the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
74
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cruise control* (p. 180)
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Heating* of the steering wheel (p. 75)
03 Instruments and controls
Heating* of the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be heated with electric heating.
Function
approx. 10 °C. Activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR (p. 103).
Light switches
The headlamp control activates and adjusts
the external lighting. It is also used to adjust
the display, instrument and passenger compartment lighting.
03
Button position may vary depending on equipment selected and market.
Repeatedly press the button to switch
between the following functions:
Function
Indicator
Switched off
Button lamp extinguished
Heating
Button lamp illuminated
Automatic steering wheel heating
With activated automatic start of steering
wheel heating, the heating of the steering
wheel starts when the engine is started. Automatic start takes place when the car is cold
and the ambient temperature is below
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
75
03 Instruments and controls
||
Overview, light switches
Knob positions
Position
Specification
Daytime running lightsA when
the car's electrical system is in
key position II or the engine is
running.
03
Main beam flash can be used.
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting as well as ambient
lighting*
Button for rear fog lamp
Knob for daytime running lights and parking lamps
Thumbwheel19 for headlamp levelling
Position
Specification
Daytime running lights and
position/parking lamps/side
marker lamps during the day
when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the
engine is running.
Daytime running lights and
position/parking lamps/side
marker lamps when the car's
electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.
Automatic switching to dipped
beam and position/parking
lamps/side marker lamps in
poor light conditions or when
the windscreen wipers or rear
fog lamps are activated.
Automatic switching to position/parking lamps/side marker
lamps when the car is parked.
The tunnel detection (p. 78)*
function is activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
The active high beam (p. 80)*
function can be used.
Main beam can be activated
when dipped beam is switched
on.
Main beam flash can be used.
19
76
Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Position
Specification
Dipped beam and position/
parking lamps/side marker
lamps.
Position/parking lamps
1. Leave the engine running, or have the
car's electrical system in key position I.
Position/parking lamps are switched on with
the headlamp control's knob.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
A
03
Fitted in or under the front bumper.
mode is used
Volvo recommends that
when the car is being driven, as long as traffic
situations or weather conditions are unfavourable for the active high beam function*.
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position; see
Key positions - functions at different levels (p.
67).
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
thumbwheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could
dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by
adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the
beam if the car is heavily laden.
Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.
Only driver
Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat
Occupants in all seats
Occupants in all seats and maximum load
in the cargo area
The driver and maximum load in the
cargo area
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have
automatic headlamp levelling and are therefore not equipped with the thumbwheel.
Knob for headlamp control in the position for
position/parking lamps.
(numTurn the knob to the position for
ber plate lighting is switched on at the same
time).
If the car's electrical system is in key position
II or the engine is running then the daytime
running lights also switch on.
When it is dark outside and the boot lid is
opened the rear position/parking lamps illuminate to alert traffic behind. This takes place
irrespective of what position the knob is in or
what key position the car's electrical system
is in.
Related information
•
Light switches (p. 75)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
77
03 Instruments and controls
Daytime running lights
With the knob for headlamp control in posiand the car's electrical system in
tion
key position II or the engine running, the daytime running lights are activated automatically
in good light conditions.
03
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with its lights in a
correct state and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Tunnel detection*
In markets without automatic dipped beam,
tunnel detection activates dipped beam when
driving into a tunnel. Dipped beam is deactivated approx. 20 seconds after the car has
been driven out of the tunnel.
The tunnel detection function is available in
cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the
entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting
from daytime running lights to dipped beam.
Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the
tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running
lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel
within this time period then dipped beam is
kept switched on. This avoids repeated
changes to the car's light settings.
Note that the headlamp control's knob must
position for tunnel detection
remain in
to work.
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.
With the knob for headlamp control in
position the daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Lights - DRL) are activated automatically when the car is driven during the day. A
light sensor on the top of the instrument
panel changes from daytime running lights to
dipped beam at twilight or when daylight
becomes too weak. Switching to dipped
beam also takes place if the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
78
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 79)
Light switches (p. 75)
03 Instruments and controls
Main/dipped beam
Dipped beam
With the knob for headlamp control in posiand the car's electrical system in
tion
key position II or the engine running, the
dipped beam is activated automatically in
poor light conditions.
With the knob in
position, dipped beam
is activated automatically at twilight or when
daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is
also activated automatically if the windscreen
wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
With the knob for headlamp control in posidipped beam is always switched on
tion
when the engine is running or when key position II is active.
With the knob in position
dipped beam
is always switched on when the engine is running or when key position II is active.
Main beam flash
switched on/off simultaneously with the main
beam21, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 81)
Active high beam* (p. 80)
Light switches (p. 75)
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
(p. 87)
03
Tunnel detection* (p. 78)
Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to the position for main beam
flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk
switch is released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the knob
20 or
is in position
. Activate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk switch
towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing.
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the combined
instrument panel.
Auxiliary lamps*
If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can
use the MY CAR menu system to choose
whether they should be deactivated or
20
21
When dipped beam is switched on.
Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
03 Instruments and controls
Active high beam*
symbol
When AHB is activated the
turns white in the instrument's information
display.
The Active High Beam function detects the
headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the
rear lights of vehicles in front, and switches
the lighting from main beam to dipped beam.
The lighting returns to main beam when the
incoming light has stopped.
03
When main beam is activated, the symbol
shines blue.
Manual operation
Active high beam - AHB
Active high beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is
a function which uses a camera sensor at the
top edge of the windscreen to detect the
headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the
rear lights of vehicles in front, and then
switches from main beam to dipped beam.
The function can also take streetlights into
account.
The lighting returns to main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Activating/deactivating
AHB can be activated when the headlamp
control's knob is in position
(provided
that the function has not been deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR), see MY CAR (p.
103).
NOTE
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in
AUTO position.
The function can start while driving in the
dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or
higher.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the lefthand stalk switch towards the steering wheel
to the end position and then releasing. Deactivation when main beam is on means that the
lights are reset directly to dipped beam.
Car with analogue combined instrument
panel
When AHB is activated the
symbol illuminates in the instrument's information display.
When main beam is switched on the
symbol also illuminates in the combined
instrument panel.
Car with digital combined instrument panel
80
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the
windscreen in front of the camera sensor
as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
one or more of the systems dependent on
the camera to stop working.
If the message Active main beam
Temporary unavailable Switch manually is
shown in the combined instrument panel's
information display then you have to switch
manually between main and dipped beam.
However, the knob for headlamp control can
still remain in position
. The same
applies if the message Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual and the
symbol
symbol goes out when
are shown. The
these messages are shown.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in
situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When
03 Instruments and controls
AHB becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked, the
symbol
message extinguishes and the
illuminates.
Active Xenon headlamps*
IMPORTANT
Active Xenon headlamps are designed to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.
Examples of when manual switching
between main and dipped beam may be
required:
WARNING
AHB is an aid for using optimum light
composition when conditions are favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for
manually switching between main and
dipped beam when traffic situations or
weather conditions so require.
•
•
•
•
•
In heavy rain or dense fog
•
When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
•
If there are pedestrians on or beside
the road
•
If there are highly reflective objects
such as signs in the vicinity of the road
•
When the lighting from oncoming traffic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
•
When there is traffic on connecting
roads
•
•
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
Active Xenon headlamps ABL
In freezing rain
In snow flurries or slush
03
In moonlight
When driving in poorly lit built-up
areas
In sharp bends.
For more information on the limitations of the
camera sensor, see Collision warning system*
- camera sensor limitations (p. 215).
Related information
•
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 79)
Light switches (p. 75)
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps (Active Bending Lights – ABL) the light
from the headlamps follows the steering
wheel movement in order to provide maximum lighting in bends and junctions and so
provide increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started (provided that it has not
been deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR), see MY CAR (p. 103). In the event
symbol illuof a fault in the function the
minates in the combined instrument panel at
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
03 Instruments and controls
||
the same time as the information display
shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol.
Symbol
03
Display
Specification
Headlamp
system
malfunction Service
required
The system is
disengaged. Visit
a workshop if
the message
remains. Volvo
recommends
that you contact
an authorised
Volvo workshop.
The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving.
The function22 can be deactivated/activated
in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
103).
For headlamp pattern adjustment, see Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 87).
Related information
82
•
•
•
Active high beam* (p. 80)
22
Activated on delivery from the factory.
Main/dipped beam (p. 79)
Light switches (p. 75)
Rear fog lamp
When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog
lamp can be used so that other road users
shall notice vehicles in front at an early stage.
the headlamp control's knob is turned to
or
.
position
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps
vary from country to country.
Related information
•
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
when key position II is active or the engine is
running and the headlamp control's knob is in
or
.
position
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog
lamp's indicator symbol
in the combined instrument panel and the light in the
button both illuminate when the rear fog lamp
is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off or when
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Light switches (p. 75)
03 Instruments and controls
Brake lights
Hazard warning flashers
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
The hazard warning flashers warn other road
users by means of all of the car's direction
indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when
this function is activated.
The brake light is switched on when the brake
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched
on when one of driving support systems
Adaptive cruise control (p. 182), City Safety
(p. 200) or Collision warning system (p. 207)
brakes the car.
When the hazard warning flashers are activated both direction indicator symbols flash in
the combined instrument panel.
again or the button is depressed. For more
information on emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers, see Foot
brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 273).
Related information
•
Direction indicators (p. 84)
03
For information on emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning flashers, see
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 273).
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. Both direction indicator symbols
in the combined instrument panel flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car has been braked
so suddenly that the emergency brake lights
have been activated at a speed below
10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain
on when the car has stopped and are deactivated automatically when the car is driven off
83
03 Instruments and controls
Direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated
with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the
stalk switch is moved.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols
Interior lighting
The passenger compartment lighting is activated/deactivated with the buttons in the controls above the front seats and the rear seat.
For direction indicator symbols, see Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator
symbols (p. 60).
Related information
03
Hazard warning flashers (p. 83)
G021149
•
Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Direction indicators.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Short flash sequence
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times. The
function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY
CAR (p. 103).
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.
84
Interior lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually within
30 minutes from when:
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0
•
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
03 Instruments and controls
Front roof lighting
Automatic lighting
The front reading lamps are switched on or
off by pressing the relevant button in the roof
console.
The switch for passenger compartment lighting has three positions for the lighting in the
passenger compartment:
Rear roof lighting
•
Off – right-hand side pressed in, automatic lighting deactivated.
•
Neutral position – automatic lighting
activated.
•
On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger
compartment lighting switched on.
G021150
Neutral position
Rear roof lighting.
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.
When the button is in neutral position the
passenger compartment lighting is switched
on and off automatically in accordance with
the following.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds
if:
•
the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade, see Remote control
key - functions (p. 152) or Detachable
key blade - unlocking doors (p. 156)
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position
0.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment lighting) is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
Vanity mirror lighting
•
•
The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 141) is
switched on and off respectively when the
cover is opened or closed.
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on and remains on for two minutes if one of
the doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and
the car is locked then it will be switched off
automatically after two minutes.
Mood lights
When the normal passenger compartment
lighting is switched off and the engine is running, a number of LEDs illuminate, including
one in the ceiling lighting, in order to provide
a low-light and enhance the mood while driving. This lighting goes out for a little while
after the normal passenger compartment
lighting when the car is locked. The brightness is controlled using the thumbwheel on
the headlamp control (p. 75).
03
the engine is started
the car is locked.
85
03 Instruments and controls
03
Home safe light duration
Approach light duration
Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam,
parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors,
number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as
well as courtesy lighting.
Approach light duration consists of parking
lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number
plate lighting, interior roof lighting as well as
courtesy lighting.
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting
after the car has been locked.
Approach lighting is switched on with the
remote control key, see Remote control key functions (p. 152), and is used to switch on
the car's lighting at a distance.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward
the steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated
in the same way as with main beam flash;
see Main/dipped beam (p. 79).
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy
lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
•
86
Approach light duration (p. 86)
When the function is activated with the
remote control, the parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof
lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
•
Home safe light duration (p. 86)
03 Instruments and controls
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp
pattern
Active Xenon headlamps*
set to the adjusted position, see preceding
illustration.
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to
avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can
be set for right or left-hand traffic.
Example 2
A car that is delivered in the UK is designed
for left-hand traffic and is driven there with
the headlamps in normal position, see preceding illustration.
G019442
Halogen headlamps
G021151
Headlamp control for adjusting headlamp pattern.
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
Masking the headlamps
Normal position – the headlamp pattern is
correct for the country in which the car
was delivered.
Adapted position – designed for opposite
headlamp pattern.
WARNING
G021152
The headlamps must be handled with
extreme caution due to the Xenon lamp
being supplied by a high-voltage unit.
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
03
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps
is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.
The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for
right-hand drive cars, see the later section "Templates for halogen headlamps":
•
A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right
lens)
•
•
B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
•
D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left
lens)
C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right
lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
waterproof material and cut it out.
The country in which the car is delivered
determines whether normal position is
designed for right or left-hand traffic.
Example 1
If a car that is delivered in Sweden shall be
driven in the UK then the headlamps must be
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
87
03 Instruments and controls
||
3. Start from the design line on the headlamp lenses; see the dotted line in the following figure. Position the self-adhesive
templates at the right distance from each
design line using the illustration and the
dimensions in the following list:
03
88
•
•
•
•
A = LHD Right - approx. 86 mm
B = LHD Left - approx. 40 mm
C = RHD Right - 0 mm
D = RHD Left - approx. 96 mm
03 Instruments and controls
03
Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
}}
89
03 Instruments and controls
||
Templates for halogen headlamps
03
90
03 Instruments and controls
Wipers and washing
Wipers and washers clean the windscreen
and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned
with high-pressure washing.
Windscreen wipers23
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when
intermittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen is scraped away.
Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0
to switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in
the button illuminates and the rain sensor
symbol
is shown in the combined
instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
The wipers sweep at high speed.
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Service position wiper blade
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades
and replacement of wiper blades, see Wiper
blades (p. 339) and Car washing (p. 359).
Rain sensor*
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
switch must be in position 0 or in the position
for a single sweep.
03
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but. The windscreen wipers make one
ton
sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to
make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity.
(An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.)
Deactivate
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
or move the stalk switch down
button
to another wiper program.
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
23
For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 339). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 340).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}}
91
03 Instruments and controls
||
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
the ignition switch or five minutes after the
engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
03
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash.
Switch off the rain sensor while the car is
in motion or when the remote control key
is in position I or II. The symbol in the
combined instrument panel and the lamp
in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps and the headlamps are washed
once the stalk switch has been released.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
freezing solid.
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors operate their
respective power window.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes
a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,
the headlamps are washed automatically at
every fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains
in the reservoir and the message that you
should fill the washer fluid is shown in the
combined instrument panel, then the supply
of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched
off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the
windscreen and the visibility through it.
Related information
•
•
Washing function.
Washing the windscreen
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers.
92
Power windows
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Washer fluid - filling (p. 340)
Washer fluid - quality and volume (p.
381)
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons;
see Child safety locks - electrical activation* (p. 169).
Rear window controls
Front window controls
WARNING
Check that no rear seat passengers are
trapped when the windows are closed
from the driver's door.
03 Instruments and controls
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers
are not trapped if the windows are closed,
even when the remote control key is used.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember
to always switch off the power supply to
the power windows by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key
with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 67).
Operating
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors can only each
operate their respective power window. Only
one control panel can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used,
the key position must be at least I - see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p. 67).
The power windows can be operated for a
few minutes after the engine has been
switched off and after the remote control key
has been removed - although not after a door
has been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
movement. It is possible to force the pinch
protection when closing has been interrupted,
e.g. with ice, by continuously holding the button up until the window is closed. The pinch
protection is reactivated after a brief pause.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind
noise when the rear windows are open is
to also open the front windows slightly.
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs
automatically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key
and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from
the outside with the remote control key or
from inside with central locking, see Remote
control key with key blade (p. 150) and Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 165).
03
Resetting
If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so
that it can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position
and hold it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.
Move one of the controls up/down gently.
The power windows move up/down as long
as the control is held in position.
93
03 Instruments and controls
Sun blind*
Door mirrors
Sun blinds are built into the panel on each
rear door.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with
the joystick in the driver's door controls.
There is a sun blind built into the rear parcel
shelf.
Door mirrors
Rear door
03
–
When the sun blind is not in use - unhook it,
hold onto the handle and allow the blind to
roll up slowly.
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting
1. Pull up the sun blind and hook it into the
hook in the upper door frame.
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Lock the sun blind by moving the catch
upwards.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
The window can also be opened and closed
when the sun blind is pulled up.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
Hook with associated catch
Rear window
94
Pull up the sun blind and hook it into the
roof clip using the two hooks for the
blind.
> The spring force in the blind keeps the
hooks in position.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
WARNING
The mirror on the driver's side is the wideangle type to provide optimal vision.
Objects may appear further away than
they actually are.
Storing the
position24
The mirror positions are stored in the key
memory when the car has been locked with
the remote control key. When the car is
unlocked with the same remote control key
the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the
stored positions when the driver's door is
opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
103).
Angling the door mirror when parking24
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking for example.
–
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing
the button labelled L or R respectively.
24
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking24
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
is automatically angled down so that the
driver can see the side of the road when
parking for example. When reverse gear is
disengaged the mirror automatically returns
to its original position after a short time.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
103).
Automatic retraction when locking24
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
103).
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work correctly:
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (key position must be at least I).
03
2. Release them after
approximately 1 second. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully retracted
position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Home safe and approach lighting
The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates
when approach lighting (p. 86) or home safe
lighting (p. 86) is selected.
Related information
•
•
Rearview mirror - interior (p. 96)
Windows and rearview and door mirrors heating (p. 96)
2. Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.
Only in combination with power seat with memory; see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 69).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
03 Instruments and controls
Windows and rearview and door
mirrors - heating
The defroster is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen, rear window
and door mirrors.
Heated windscreen*, rear window and
door mirrors
03
cally after a certain time. Following which,
rear window heating is switched on and off
automatically as long as the outside temperature is lower than +7 °C.
NOTE
Rear window heating is not switched on
and off automatically if the Eco function is
activated, but then remains switched off,
even in outside temperatures below +7 °C.
For information about the Eco function,
see ECO* (p. 270).
Rearview mirror - interior
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed
with a control in the mirror's lower edge.
Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims automatically.
Interior rearview mirror
See also Demisting and defrosting the windscreen (p. 125).
Heating, windscreen
The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/defrosted automatically if the car is
started in an outside temperature lower than
+7 °C. Automatic defrosting can be selected
in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
103).
Heating, rear window and door mirrors
The function is used to remove ice and misting from the windscreen, rear window and
door mirrors.
One press of the respective button starts the
heating. The light in the button indicates that
the function is active. Switch off the heating
as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order
not to load the battery unnecessarily. However, the function is switched off automati-
96
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when
lights from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
03 Instruments and controls
Automatic dimming*
Compass*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control
for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.
The rearview mirror contains an integrated
display that shows the compass direction in
which the front of the car is pointing.
The rearview mirror contains two sensors one forward facing and one rearward facing that work together to identify and eliminate
dazzling light. The forward facing sensor
detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle
headlights behind.
Operation
The compass (p. 97) can only be specified
for a rearview mirror with automatic dimming.
Related information
•
Door mirrors (p. 94)
Calibration
The compass may need calibrating to show
the correct compass direction.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass should be calibrated if the car
is moved across several magnetic zones.
03
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
1. Stop the car in a large open area free
from steel structures and high-voltage
power lines.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or
objects in the seats or on the parcel shelf
in such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensors, then the dimming
function of the rearview mirror is reduced.
side of the mirror using a paper clip for example.
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.)
and ensure that all doors are closed.
Rearview mirror with compass.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
the compass direction in which the front of
the car is pointing. Eight different directions
are shown with English abbreviations: N
(north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south
east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west)
and NW (north west).
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if
electrical equipment is not switched off.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed
approx. 3 seconds. The number of the
current magnetic zone is shown.
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or when key position II is
active, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 67). To deactivate/activate the
compass - press in the button on the under-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
97
03 Instruments and controls
Sunroof*
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically
at the rear edge and horizontally. Key position
I or II is required for the sunroof to be
opened.
G030295
03
7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the
character C is shown in the display when
the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with
point 6 above with the heated windscreen
activated, see Demisting and defrosting
the windscreen (p. 125).
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
The sunroof can be operated with a control in
the roof panel.
The sunroof's inner sunscreen is closed manually.
The sunroof has a wind deflector.
Horizontal opening
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating
that calibration is complete. Then drive a
further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
G021343
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character C, or hold the button on the
bottom of the rearview mirror depressed
for approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper
clip) until the character C is shown.
Horizontal opening, backward/forward.
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
98
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
For maximum sunroof opening, move the
control back to the position for automatic
opening and release.
Open manually by pulling the control backwards to the point of resistance for manual
opening. The sunroof moves to maximum
open position as long as the button is kept
depressed.
Closing
Close manually by pushing the control forwards to the point of resistance for manual
closing. The sunroof moves to closed position as long as the button is kept depressed.
Closing using the remote control key or
central locking button
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the sunroof by selecting key
position 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For
information on key positions - see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p.
67).
03
Vertical opening
G021345
Opening
One long press on the lock button closes the
sunroof and all the windows, see Remote
control key - functions (p. 152) and Locking/
unlocking - from the inside (p. 165). The
doors and the boot lid are locked. To interrupt closing, press the lock button again.
WARNING
Close automatically by pressing the control to
the position for automatic closing and then
release it.
The power supply to the sunroof is switched
off by selecting key position 0 and removing
the remote control key from the ignition
switch.
G028899
Risk of crushing when the sunroof is
closed. The sunroof's pinch-protection
function only operates during automatic
closing, not manual.
Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the
control upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control down.
WARNING
If the sunroof is closed with the remote
control key, check that no one risks being
trapped.
Sunscreen
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automatically when the sunroof is opened. Grip
the handle and slide the screen forward to
close it.
}}
99
03 Instruments and controls
||
Pinch protection
The sunroof's pinch protection function is
triggered if it is blocked by an object during
automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will
stop and automatically open to the previous
position.
Wind deflector
Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel
The left-hand stalk controls the menus (p.
101) shown on the information display in the
combined instrument panel (p. 55). Which
menus are shown depends on the key position (p. 67).
03
Display (digital combined instrument panel) and
controls for menu navigation.
OK – access to message list and message confirmation.
Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
The sunroof has a wind deflector that is
folded up when the sunroof is in the open
position.
Display (analogue combined instrument panel)
and controls for menu navigation.
RESET – reset the active function. Used
in certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each
respective function.
If there is a message (p. 101) then it must be
acknowledged with OK in order that the
menus shall be shown.
Related information
•
100
Messages - handling (p. 102)
03 Instruments and controls
Menu overview - combined
instrument panel
Which menus are shown in the combined
instrument panel's information display
depends on the key position (p. 67).
Some of the following menu options require
the function and hardware to be installed in
the car.
Analogue combined instrument panel
Digital speed
Parking heater*
Parking heater*
Messages
Trip computer reset
When a warning, information or indicator
symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears on the information display.
Related information
•
Analogue combined instrument panel overview (p. 55)
Message
Specification
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 56)
Stop safelyA
•
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 100)
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Stop engineA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Service
urgentA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car immediately.
Service
requiredA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
See manualA
Read the owner's manual.
Book time
for maintenance
Time to book regular
service - contact a workshopB.
Additional heater*
TC options
Service status
Oil
level25
Messages (##)26
Digital combined instrument panel
Settings*
Themes
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Service status
Messages26
03
Oil level25
25
26
Certain engines.
The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
101
03 Instruments and controls
||
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
Time for regular maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB. The
timing is determined by
the number of kilometres
driven, number of months
since the last service,
engine running time and
oil grade.
Transmission
hot Stop
safely Wait
for cooling
Critical fault. Stop the car
immediately in a safe
manner and contact a
workshopB.
Temporarily
offA
A function has been temporarily switched off and
is reset automatically
while driving or after starting again.
Low battery
charge
Power save
mode
The audio system is
switched off to save
energy. Charge the battery.
03
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals are
not followed then the
warranty does not cover
any damaged parts contact a workshopB.
Transmission
Oil change
needed
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Transmission
Reduced
performance
The gearbox cannot handle full capacity. Drive
carefully until the message clearsC.
A
B
C
102
Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge
and browse among messages (p. 101) that
are shown in the information display of the
combined instrument panel.
When a warning, information or indicator
symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears in the display at the same time. An
error message is stored in a memory list until
the fault has been rectified.
Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to
acknowledge a message. Scroll through messages with the thumbwheel (p. 100).
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you
are using the trip computer, the message
must be read (press OK) before the previous activity can be resumed.
Part of message, shown together with information on
where the problem has arisen.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more information regarding the automatic gearbox, see
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 255).
Related information
•
•
If shown repeatedly contact a workshopB.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Messages - handling
Drive more smoothly or
stop the car in a safe
manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clearsC.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Messages - handling (p. 102)
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 100)
Related information
•
Menu overview - combined instrument
panel (p. 101)
03 Instruments and controls
MY CAR
lighted menu option or store the selected
function in the memory.
MY CAR is a menu source that handles many
of the car's functions, e.g. City Safety, locks
and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the
clock, etc.
TUNE - turn the knob in the centre console or the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel to scroll up/down through the
menu options.
Certain functions are standard, others are
optional - the range also varies depending on
the market.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Operation
03
Depending on the function the cursor is on
when EXIT is pressed, and on the menu level,
one of the following may occur:
Navigation in the menus is carried out using
buttons in the centre console or with the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
•
•
•
•
•
phone call is rejected
current function is interrupted
input characters are deleted
most recent selections are undone
leads up in the menu system.
Short and long press may produce varying
results.
A long press leads to the highest menu level
(main source view), from where all of the car's
functions/menu sources can be accessed.
Menu options and search paths
MY CAR - opens the menu system MY
CAR.
For a description of the menu options and
search paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus
Infotainment supplement.
OK/MENU - press the button in the centre console or the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel to select/tick in the high-
103
03 Instruments and controls
Trip computer
Group menus
The car's trip computer can record, calculate
and show information while driving.
The trip computer has two different group
menus:
Trip computer content and appearance varies
depending on whether the combined instrument panel is the "Analog" type or "Digital":
03
•
Trip computer - combined instrument
panel "Analogue" (p. 105)
•
Trip computer - combined instrument
panel "Digital" (p. 109)
Checking and settings can be made immediately after the combined instrument panel is
automatically illuminated in connection with
unlocking. If none of the trip computer's controls are actuated within approx. 30 seconds
after the driver's door has been opened then
the instrument extinguishes, after which
either key position II (p. 67) or engine starting
is required in order to operate the trip computer.
•
•
The trip computer's functions or headings
are each listed in an infinite loop.
Related information
•
•
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the
trip computer is used then the message
must first be acknowledged before the trip
computer can be reactivated.
•
104
Functions
Heading in combined instrument panel
Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 113)
Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 112)
03 Instruments and controls
Trip computer - combined instrument
panel "Analog"
The car's trip computer can record, calculate
and show information while driving.
The trip computer's menu is in a variable
loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip
computer's display extinguishes - this also
marks the start/end of the loop.
Functions
Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
functions:
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
03
4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after
completed checking/ adjustment.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:
Information display and controls.
OK - Opens the loop with the trip computer's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.
}}
105
03 Instruments and controls
||
03
Functions
Information
Digital speed
Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel:
•
•
•
•
km/h
Open with OK, select with the thumbwheel, confirm with OK and back out with ENTER.
mph
No display
Parking heater*
•
•
DIRECT START
•
- Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting time.
For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment
heater* - timer (p. 131).
- Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting time.
Additional heater*
For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 135).
• Auto On
• Off
TC options
•
•
•
•
•
Distance to empty tank
Fuel consumption
Average speed
Trip meter T1 and total dist.
Trip meter T2 and total dist.
Here you can select/activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in
the trip computer. The symbols for the items already selected are WHITE with a "tick" - others are
GREY and have no "tick":
1. Open the function with OK, scroll through the symbols for the options with the thumbwheel
and select/stop on the desired symbol.
2. Confirm with OK - the symbol changes colour from GREY to WHITE and is marked with a
"tick".
3. Continue to select the function symbols with the thumbwheel or finish with RESET.
Service status
106
Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
A
Functions
Information
Oil levelA
For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 325).
Messages (##)
For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 102).
Certain engines.
Headings
One of the headings in the following table can
be selected for constant display in the combined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to
determine which:
2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable headings for the trip computer are shown in a
loop.
03
3. Stop on desired heading.
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
Trip computer heading in combined instrument
panel
Information
Trip meter T1 and total dist.
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Trip meter T2 and total dist.
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
Distance to empty
For more information - see the section "Range - distance to empty tank" (p. 112).
Fuel consumption
Current consumption.
Average speed
•
No trip computer information.
This option shows a blank display - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.
The combined instrument panel's trip computer can be changed to another option at
Long press on RESET resets Average speed.
any time during the journey. Proceed as follows:
–
Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the
desired heading.
}}
107
03 Instruments and controls
||
Related information
•
Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 112)
•
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 113)
03
108
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Trip computer - combined instrument
panel "Digital"
The car's trip computer can record, calculate
and show information while driving.
The trip computer's menu is in a variable
loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip
computer's three displays extinguish - this
also marks the start/end of the loop.
Functions
Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
functions:
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
03
4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after
completed checking/ adjustment.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:
Information displays and stalk switch controls.
OK - Opens the loop with the trip computer's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.
}}
109
03 Instruments and controls
||
Functions
Information
Trip computer reset
Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2 - see the table under the next
section "Headings" or the section "Resetting with 'Digital'" (p. 112) for information on the process.
•
•
03
Average
Average speed
Messages
For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 102).
Themes
The appearance of the combined instrument panel (p. 55) is selected here.
Settings*
Select Auto On or Off.
For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 135).
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
Parking heater*
For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 131).
• Direct start
• - Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
•
A
- Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
Service status
Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.
Oil levelA
For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 325).
Certain engines.
Headings
Three trip computer headings can be displayed simultaneously - one in each "window" (see previous figure).
110
One of the heading combinations in the following table can be selected for constant dis-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
play in the combined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to determine which:
03 Instruments and controls
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable heading combinations are shown in a loop.
Heading combinations
3. Stop on desired heading combination.
Information
Average
Trip meter T1 + Meter reading
Average speed
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Instantaneous
Trip meter T2 + Meter reading
Distance to empty
tank
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
Instantaneous
Meter reading
kmh<>mph
No trip computer information.
03
kmh<>mph - see section "Digital speed display" (p. 112).
This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also marks
the beginning/end of the loop.
The combined instrument panel's heading
combination for the trip computer can be
changed to another option at any time during
the journey. Proceed as follows:
–
Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the
desired heading.
Related information
•
Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 112)
•
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 113)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
111
03 Instruments and controls
Trip computer - supplementary
information
Range - distance to empty tank
Resetting with "Analog"
The trip computer shows the approximate
distance that can be driven with the fuel
quantity remaining in the tank.
With current trip computer heading - Trip
meter T1, Trip meter T2 or Average speed shown in the combined instrument panel:
No guaranteed range remains when the heading Distance to empty shows "----".
–
Average
–
Each heading must be zeroed individually.
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the last resetting.
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity.
The car's trip computer can record, calculate
and show information while driving. Supplementary information of several functions follows below.
03
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven heater* has been used.
Average speed
The average speed is calculated for the driving distance driven since the last reset to
zero.
Instantaneous
The information for current fuel consumption
is updated continuously - approximately once
per second. When the car is driven at low
speed the consumption is shown per time
unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to
mileage.
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for
the display - see the section "Change unit" (p.
112).
27
112
In which case, refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
the driving style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in
a longer driving distance. For more information on how fuel consumption can be influenced, see Volvo Car Corporation 's Environmental Philosophy (p. 18).
Digital speed
display27
The speed is shown in the opposite unit
(kmh/mph) in relation to the main instrument.
If it is calibrated in mph then the trip computer shows the corresponding speed in
km/h and vice versa.
Only for combined instrument panel "Digital".
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Give a long press on RESET - selected
heading is zeroed.
Resetting with "Digital"
Trip meter:
1. Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading
combination containing the trip meter to
be reset.
2. Give a long press on RESET - selected
trip meter is zeroed.
Average speed & Average consumption:
1. Select function Trip computer reset and
activate with OK.
2. Select one of the following options with
the thumbwheel and activate with OK:
•
•
•
l/100 km
km/h
Reset both
3. Finish with RESET.
03 Instruments and controls
Change unit
Trip computer - trip statistics*
Operation
You can change unit (km/miles) for distance
and speed in the menu system My Car, see
MY CAR (p. 103).
Information is stored about completed trips
containing average fuel consumption and
average speed, which can be viewed in the
centre console's screen as a bar chart.
Different settings can be made in the menu
system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103)
NOTE
In addition to in the trip computer, these
units are also changed in Volvo's navigation system*.
• Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete
all previous statistics, go back out of the
menu by selecting EXIT.
Function
• Reset for every driving cycle - check
the box by selecting ENTER and go back
out of the menu by selecting EXIT.
Related information
•
With the "Reset for every driving cycle"
option checked, all statistics are deleted
automatically once driving is complete and
the car has been stopped for 4 hours. Trip
statistics start again from zero the next time
the engine is started.
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 113)
Trip statistics28.
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven
distance, depending on the scale selected the bar at the far right shows the value for the
current kilometre or 10 km.
Using the TUNE control, the scale for the
bars can be changed between 1 km and
10 km - the cursor on the far right changes
position between up and down in relation to
the scale selected.
28
03
If a new driving cycle is started before
4 hours have elapsed then the current period
must first be deleted manually using the
"Start new trip" option.
See also information on Eco guide (p. 59).
Related information
•
Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 112)
The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
113
CLIMATE CONTROL
04 Climate control
General information on climate
control
The car is equipped with electronic climate
control (p. 121). The climate control system
cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air
in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
Air conditioning (AC) (p. 125) can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compartment, and to prevent the windows
from misting, it should always be switched
on.
To bear in mind
•
To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows and sunroof*
should be closed.
•
Total airing function (p. 166) opens/
closes all side windows simultaneously
and can be used for example to quickly
air the car during hot weather.
•
Remove ice and snow from the climate
control system air intake (the grille
between the bonnet and the windscreen).
•
In warm weather, condensation from the
air conditioning may drip under the car.
This is normal.
•
When the engine requires full power, e.g.
for full acceleration or driving uphill with a
trailer, the air conditioning can be temporarily switched off. There may then be a
temporary increase in temperature in the
passenger compartment.
•
Remove misting on the insides of the windows primarily by using the defroster
function (p. 125). To reduce the risk of
misting, keep the windows clean and use
window cleaner.
NOTE
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Actual temperature (p. 116)
Menu settings - climate control (p. 118)
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 121)
Air distribution in the passenger compartment (p. 119)
Air cleaning (p. 116)
To avoid misting on the rear window, do
not block the ventilation holes at the back
of the parcel shelf with articles of clothing
or other objects.
04
Cars with Start/Stop*
With an auto-stopped (p. 261) engine certain
equipment may have its function temporarily
reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed (p.
124).
Cars with ECO*
Certain equipment may have its function temporarily reduced or deactivated when the
ECO (p. 270) function is activated, e.g. the air
conditioning (p. 125).
NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several
electricity consumer functions are reduced
- a press of the AC button resets the climate control system, but then with
reduced AC function.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
115
04 Climate control
04
Actual temperature
Sensors - climate control
Air cleaning
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physical
experience with reference to factors such as
air speed, humidity and solar radiation etc. in
and around the car.
The climate control system has a number of
sensors to help control the temperature (p.
116) in the car.
•
The sun sensor is located on the top side
of the dashboard.
The interior in a passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
even for people with contact allergies and for
asthma sufferers.
The system includes a sun sensor (p. 116)
which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This
means that the temperature can differ
between the right and left-hand air vents
despite the controls being set for the same
temperature on both sides.
•
The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.
•
The outside temperature sensor is
located in the door mirror.
•
The humidity sensor* is located by the
interior rearview mirror.
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment (p. 124)
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Related information
•
116
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
•
Passenger compartment filter (p. 117)
Material in the passenger compartment (p. 118)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) (p.
117)*
•
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p.
118)*
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
04 Climate control
Air cleaning - passenger
compartment filter
Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP)*
For more information on CZIP, see the brochure included with the purchase of the car.
All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter.
CZIP comprises a series of modifications that
keep the passenger compartment even
clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.
Related information
The filter must be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for
the recommended replacement intervals. If
the car is used in a severely contaminated
environment, it may be necessary to replace
the filter more often.
The following is included:
•
NOTE
There are different types of passenger
compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Related information
•
Air cleaning (p. 116)
•
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Air cleaning (p. 116)
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the
passenger compartment with fresh air.
The function starts when required and is
disengaged automatically after a time or
when one of the passenger compartment
doors is opened.
04
The air quality system IAQS (p. 118) is a
fully automatic system that cleans the air
in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone.
NOTE
To keep the CZIP standard in cars with
CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed after
15 000 km or once per year depending on
whichever occurs first. However, up to
75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without
CZIP and where the customer does not
want to keep the CZIP standard the IAQS
filter must be changed at a regular service.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
117
04 Climate control
Air cleaning - IAQS*
Air cleaning - material
Menu settings - climate control
The air quality system IAQS separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours
and pollution in the passenger compartment.
Tested materials have been developed in
order to minimise the quantity of dust in the
passenger compartment and to contribute to
making the passenger compartment easier to
keep clean.
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
the default settings for six of the climate control system's functions via the centre console.
•
Fan level during automatic climate control
(p. 124).
The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and
easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
agents and car care products recommended
by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 361).
•
•
Recirculation timer (p. 126).
•
•
Interior air quality system (p. 118)*.
•
Automatic start of steering wheel heating
(p. 75).
If the outside air is contaminated then the air
intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 103).
NOTE
04
The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment.
Related information
•
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so
as to prevent misting.
In the event of misting, the air quality sensor should be disengaged, and the
defroster functions for the windscreen and
side windows, as well as the rear window,
should be used.
Related information
118
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
•
Air cleaning (p. 116)
Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* (p. 117)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Air cleaning (p. 116)
Automatic start of rear window defroster
(p. 96).
Automatic start of seat heating driver (p.
122).
More information is available in the description of the menu system (p. 103).
The climate control system's functions can be
reset to default settings in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
04 Climate control
Air distribution in the passenger
compartment
Air vents in the dashboard
Air vents in the door pillars
G021366
G021368
The incoming air is divided between a number
of different vents in the passenger compartment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode.
If necessary it can be controlled manually;
see the air distribution table (p. 128).
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Lateral airflow
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to
remove misting.
04
Aim the vents at the windows to remove misting in cold weather.
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to maintain a comfortable climate in the
rear seat in hot weather.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts.
}}
119
04 Climate control
||
Air distribution
04
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - ventilation floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When
pressing the buttons the corresponding figure
is illuminated in the display screen (see following figure) and an arrow in front of each
part of the figure shows the air distribution
that is selected. For more information, see the
air distribution table (p. 128).
120
The selected air distribution is shown in the centre console display screen.
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
•
Auto-regulation (p. 124)
Air distribution - recirculation (p. 126)
04 Climate control
Electronic climate control - ECC
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains
the temperature selected in the passenger
compartment and can be set separately for
the driver's side and passenger side.
The auto function is used to automatically
control temperature, air conditioning, fan
speed, recirculation and air distribution.
04
Temperature control (p. 124), left-hand
side
Rear window and door mirror defrosters (p. 96)
Ventilated front seat (p. 123)*2, left-hand
side
Electrically heated front seat (p. 122) , left
side1
Electrically heated front seat (p. 122),
right-hand side1
Ventilated front seat*2, right-hand side
Max. defroster (p. 125)
Temperature control (p. 124), right-hand
side
Fan (p. 124)
Air distribution (p. 119) - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
1
2
Recirculation (p. 126)
AUTO - Automatic climate control (p.
124)
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 125)
The button has a different location depending on whether or not the car is equipped with ventilated front seat*.
Standard in Executive.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
121
04 Climate control
Heated front seats*
•
The front seat heating has three positions for
increasing the comfort for driver and passenger when it is cold.
Lowest heat level - one orange field illuminates in the screen.
•
Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.
WARNING
Heated rear seat*
The heating for the rear seat's outer positions
has three positions for increasing the comfort
for passengers when it is cold.
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation
or who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.
Automatic start of driver's seat heating
04
Current heat level is shown in the centre console
display screen.
The button has a different
location depending on
whether or not the car is
equipped with ventilated
front seat*, see illustration (p.
121).
Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function:
122
•
Highest heat level - three orange fields
illuminate in the centre console's screen
(see figure above).
•
Lower heat level - two orange fields illuminate in the screen.
With the automatic start of the driver's seat
heating activated, the driver's seat will have
the highest heat level when the engine is
started.
Automatic start takes place when the car is
cold and the ambient temperature is lower
than approx. +7 °C.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 103).
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Heated rear seat* (p. 122)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's
lamps.
Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function:
•
•
•
•
Highest heat level - three lamps illuminate.
Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.
04 Climate control
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation
or who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Heated front seats* (p. 122)
Ventilated front seats*3
For button location, see the
illustration (p. 121).
The ventilation can be used at the same time
as seat heating. For example, the function can
be used to dry damp from clothing.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases
the cooler the passenger compartment air
becomes. The system can be activated when
the engine is running.
The ventilation is regulated from the climate
control and takes seat temperature, solar
radiation and outside temperature into consideration.
Press the button repeatedly
in order to activate the function.
There are three comfort levels that produce
different cooling and dehumidification outputs:
•
Comfort level III: Highest output - three
blue fields illuminate in the centre console's screen (see figure above).
•
Comfort level II: Lower output - two blue
fields illuminate in the screen.
•
Comfort level I: Lowest output - one blue
field illuminates in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no field illuminates.
04
NOTE
The seat ventilation should be used carefully by people sensitive to draughts. Comfort level I is recommended for long-term
use.
Current comfort level is shown in the centre console display screen.
3
IMPORTANT
Seat ventilation cannot be started when
the passenger compartment temperature
is below 5 °C. This is in order to avoid
cooling down the seat occupant.
Standard in Executive.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
123
04 Climate control
Fan
Auto-regulation
The fan should always be activated in order to
avoid misting on the windows.
The auto function automatically regulates
temperature (p. 124), air conditioning (p.
125), fan speed (p. 124), recirculation (p. 126)
and air distribution (p. 119).
NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air
conditioning is not engaged - which can
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
Fan knob
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected, then the fan
speed is regulated automatically (p. 124) - the fan speed
previously set is disengaged.
04
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 121)
If you select one or more
manual functions, the other
functions continue to be
controlled automatically. All
manual settings are disengaged when AUTO is
pressed. The display screen
shows AUTO CLIMATE.
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment
When the car is started, the most recent temperature setting is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature
than the actual desired temperature.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
Current temperature for each side is shown in
the centre console's display screen.
The temperature can be
adjusted with the knob separately for the driver's
side and the passenger side.
124
04 Climate control
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
•
Actual temperature (p. 116)
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 121)
Air conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
When the lamp in the AC
button illuminates, the air
conditioning is controlled by
the system's automatic function.
Demisting and defrosting the
windscreen
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are
used to quickly remove misting and ice from
the windscreen and side windows.
When the lamp in the AC
button is switched off the air conditioning is
disconnected. Other functions are still controlled automatically. When the max.
defroster function (p. 125) is activated, the air
conditioning is switched on automatically so
that the air is dehumidified at the maximum
setting.
04
The selected setting is shown in the centre console's screen.
Electric heating*
Max. defroster
The light in the defroster button illuminates when the
function is active.
Press the button repeatedly
in order to activate the function.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
125
04 Climate control
||
For cars without heated windscreen:
•
Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illuminates in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no symbol illuminates.
For cars with heated windscreen:
04
•
Start the heating for the
symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.
•
Start the heating for the windscreen4 and
air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and
(2) illuminate in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no symbol illuminates.
windscreen4
NOTE
Electrically heated windscreen is not available when the engine is auto-stopped (p.
261).
NOTE
•
the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
•
recirculation and the air quality system
are automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is
operating at max.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
Related information
•
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
4
126
Select recirculation to shut out bad air,
exhaust gases etc. from the passenger compartment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the
car when this function is activated.
The following also takes place in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
NOTE
Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 16)
may have an impact on the performance of
transponders and other communication
equipment.
Air distribution - recirculation
General information on climate control (p.
115)
When recirculation is
engaged the orange lamp in
the button illuminates.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of
the windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the outside temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 103).
If the character C is shown in the rearview mirror when the heated windscreen is activated then the compass (p. 97)* must be recalibrated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Climate control
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Air distribution in the passenger compartment (p. 119)
•
Air distribution - table (p. 128)
04
127
04 Climate control
Air distribution - table
Three buttons are used to select the distribution (p. 119) of the air.
04
128
Air distribution
Use
Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not
recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.
to remove ice and misting quickly.
Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air
flows from the air vents.
to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate,
(not at too low fan speed to enable this).
Airflow to the windows and from the dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and chest from dashboard air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
04 Climate control
Air distribution
Use
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in
cold or humid weather.
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.
04
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows.
to direct heat or cold to the floor.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.
to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher
up in cold weather or hot, dry weather.
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Air distribution - recirculation (p. 126)
129
04 Climate control
Engine and passenger compartment
heater*
Refuelling
Preconditioning prepares the car's heater,
engine and passenger compartment before
departure so that both wear and energy
needs during the journey are reduced.
appears on the information display. Acknowledge the message by pressing the indicator
stalk (p. 100) OK button once.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the heater combined with
short journeys leads to the battery discharging and consequential starting problems.
The heater can be started directly (p. 131) or
with a timer (p. 131).
04
The heater cannot start if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower the
maximum running time of the heater is 50
minutes.
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors.
Exhaust gases are secreted.
NOTE
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is
active there may be smoke from the righthand wheel housing, which is perfectly
normal.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
before starting to refuel.
Check in the combined instrument panel
that the heater is switched off. The heat
symbol is shown when it is operating.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven
heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the
fuel level is too low, the heater will be
switched off automatically and a message
130
The car should be driven for the same time
as the heater is used to ensure that the
car's battery is recharged adequately to
replace the energy consumed by the
heater when it is used on a regular basis.
The heater is used for a maximum of 50
minutes each time.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages (p. 133)
•
Additional heater* (p. 135)
04 Climate control
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - direct start/
immediate stop
Upon direct start of the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 130), it will run
for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while
the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is running.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - timer
6. Briefly press OK to move to the flashing
minutes setting.
The timer of the engine block and passenger
compartment heater (p. 130) is connected to
the car's clock.
7. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the
car is heated and ready. The car's electronic
system calculates when heating should be
started based on the outside temperature.
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
10. Select the other time (continue from step
2) or exit the menu with RESET.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
04
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and activate with OK.
Adjusting5
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct
start/Stop in order to activate/deactivate
the heater and select with OK.
2. Use the thumbwheel (p. 100) to scroll to
one of the timers Parking heater and
select with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 131)
4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours
setting.
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages (p. 133)
5. Select the required hour using the thumbwheel.
5
6
9. Go back in the menu structure using
RESET.
Starting
NOTE
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
Related information
8. Press OK6 to confirm the setting.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Switching off
A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press OK to access the menu.
Setting the timer is only possible with the engine switched off.
Press OK again to activate the timer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
131
04 Climate control
||
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
> If a timer is set but not activated then a
clock icon is shown beside the set
time.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Deactivate the timer as follows:
•
•
04
long press on OK or
short press on OK to continue in the
menu. Then select to stop the timer
and confirm with OK.
5. Exit the menu with RESET.
A timer-started heater can be switched off
directly (p. 131).
Related information
•
132
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages (p. 133)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Climate control
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - messages
Symbols and display messages regarding the
engine block and passenger compartment
heater (p. 130) differ depending on whether
the combined instrument panel (p. 55) is analogue or digital.
When one of the timers has been activated,
the symbol for activated timer illuminates in
the display at the same time as the set time is
shown next to the symbol.
Symbol for activated timer in analogue combined instrument panel.
Symbol for activated timer in digital
combined instrument panel.
The table shows symbols and display texts
that appear.
When the heater has been activated
the heat symbol illuminates in the
information display.
Symbol
Display
04
Specification
The heater is switched on and running.
Fuel operated heater stopped
Battery saving mode
The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
133
04 Climate control
||
Symbol
04
134
Display
Specification
Fuel operated heater stopped
Low fuel level
Starting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate
starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.
Fuel operated heater Service
required
Heater not working. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
A display text clears automatically after a time
or after one press on the indicator stalk (p.
100) OK button.
04 Climate control
Additional heater*
zones7
In cold climate
an additional heater
may be required to obtain the correct operating temperature in the engine and to obtain
sufficient heating in the passenger compartment.
A fuel-driven additional heater (p. 135) is fitted in cars with diesel engines.
In a semi-cold7 climate zone diesel-driven
cars have an electric additional heater (p.
136) instead of a fuel-driven version.
Cars with certain petrol engines8 have an
electric additional heater integrated into the
car's climate control system.
Related information
•
Engine and passenger compartment
heater* (p. 130)
Fuel-driven additional heater*
The car is equipped with either an electric (p.
136) or a fuel-driven additional heater (p. 135).
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when
the engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the additional heater is active there
may be smoke from the right-hand wheel
housing, which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater's automatic start
sequence can be switched off if required.
3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
heater9 or Settings10 and select with
OK.
4. Select one of the options ON or OFF
using the thumbwheel and confirm with
OK.
5. Exit the menu with RESET.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key
position I - any adjustments must therefore
be made before starting the engine.
04
Passenger compartment heater*
If the additional heater is supplemented with
a timer function then it can be used as a passenger compartment heater (p. 130).
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven
additional heater should be switched off
for short distances.
1. Before starting the engine: Select key
position I (p. 67).
2. Press OK to access the menu.
7
8
9
10
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.
Analogue combined instrument panel.
Digital combined instrument panel.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
135
04 Climate control
Electric additional heater*
The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven
(p. 135) or an electric additional heater (p.
135).
The heater cannot be controlled manually, but
is instead activated automatically after the
engine has been started in outside temperatures below 14 °C and is switched off after
the set passenger compartment temperature
has been reached.
Related information
04
136
•
Engine and passenger compartment
heater* (p. 130)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
LOADING AND STORAGE
05 Loading and storage
Storage spaces
Overview of storage spaces in the passenger
compartment.
05
138
05 Loading and storage
Storage compartment in door panel
Storage pocket* on front edge of front
seat cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox (p. 141)
Storage compartment
Jacket holder (p. 140)
Storage compartment, cup holder (p.
140)
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
WARNING
05
Keep loose objects such as mobile
phones, cameras, remote controls for
accessories, etc. in the glove compartment
or other compartments. Otherwise they
may injure people in the car in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
139
05 Loading and storage
Jacket holder
Tunnel console
The coat hanger is located on the left-hand
side of the passenger seat's head restraint.
The tunnel console is located between the
front seats.
The jacket holder is only designed for light
clothing.
Related information
•
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray*
A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup
holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter
is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 142) for the
front seat.
The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 140) is
detached by lifting the tray straight up.
Storage spaces (p. 138)
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot.
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Related information
•
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
05
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter (p.
140) are specified, then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 142) for
the front seat, and a detachable ashtray
in the cup holder.)
Related information
•
140
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Storage spaces (p. 138)
Storage spaces (p. 138)
05 Loading and storage
Glovebox
Inlay mats*
Vanity mirror
The glovebox is located on the passenger
side.
Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush.
Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay
mats.
The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the
sun visor.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the bosses in order to avoid
getting caught adjacent to and under the
pedals.
Related information
The owner's manual and maps can be kept in
here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox
can be locked (p. 166)* using the key blade
(p. 156).
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 361)
G021438
•
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The light illuminates automatically when the
cover is lifted.
05
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 337)
Storage spaces (p. 138)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
141
05 Loading and storage
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets
The electrical sockets (12 V) are located next
to the cup holder1 and rear of the tunnel console.
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display
screens, music players and mobile phones.
For the socket to supply current, the remote
control key must be in at least key position I
(p. 67).
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket
is used at a time. If both sockets in the
tunnel console are used simultaneously,
7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets, no other current consumer must be
connected to the other one.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
NOTE
G021439
NOTE
05
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
display screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of
the passenger compartment's 12V electrical sockets, could be activated by the climate control system, even when the
remote control key has been removed or
when the car is locked, for example, when
the parking heater is activated at a preset
time.
G021440
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment
or accessories when not in use because
the battery could be drained in the event of
such an occurrence!
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
1
142
If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The compressor for emergency puncture
repair (p. 311) has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Related information
•
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray* (p. 140)
•
12 V electrical socket, cargo area* (p.
147)
05 Loading and storage
Refrigerator box and glasses
The Executive model is equipped with a
refrigerator box and storage compartment for
glasses in the rear seat.
The cooler box needs to have free circulation of air for optimum function. For this
reason you should leave at least 5 cm of
space at the air intake for the cooler box in
the cargo area.
G021859
Cooler box
Glass
NOTE
There is a cooler box behind the armrest in
the rear seat. The cooler box works when the
engine is running or the remote control key is
in position II.
WARNING
Store bottles well sealed in the cooler box
and make sure that the door is closed for
the journey.
G021858
G021857
There is a storage compartment for two
glasses and a bottle opener under the cover
in the armrest.
NOTE
For cars with refrigerator box, the rear seat
must be folded forward slightly before the
carpet in the cargo area can be removed.
Fold forward the backrests (p. 71) by pulling the handle.
WARNING
05
Store the glasses in the storage compartment or in the cup holders and make sure
that the armrest cover is closed while driving.
143
05 Loading and storage
Loading
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
The total of the weight of the passengers and
all accessories reduces the car's payload by
a corresponding weight. For more detailed
information on weights, see Weights (p. 370).
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h,
carry the impact of an item weighing
1000 kg.
The boot lid is opened via a button
on the lighting panel or the remote
control key, see Locking/unlocking boot lid (p. 166).
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.
WARNING
•
The car’s driving properties change
depending on the weight and positioning
of the load.
05
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy
braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.
To bear in mind when loading
•
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if
any of the rear seat's backrests is folded
down, seeWHIPS - seating position (p. 33).
144
•
•
Centre the load.
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
Heavy objects should be placed as low
as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
Never load cargo above the backrest.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long
items. Otherwise you may accidentally
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
the load into a drive position - and the car
could then move off.
Related information
•
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 146)
Loading - long load (p. 145)
•
Roof load (p. 146)
05 Loading and storage
Loading - long load
Loading - ski hatch
To simplify loading (p. 144) in the cargo area,
the rear seat backrest can be folded down.
The passenger seat backrest can also be
folded for an extra long load2.
The hatch in the backrest can be opened to
transport long narrow items.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
If the rear seat backrest needs to be lowered,
see Seats, rear (p. 71).
Fold the right-hand backrest forward.
Release the hatch in the rear seat backrest by sliding the bolt up while pressing
the hatch down/forward.
Fold back the backrest with the hatch
open.
Use the seatbelt to prevent the load from
moving.
05
WARNING
Stop the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading and unloading. Otherwise the gear lever/selector can accidentally be knocked and moved to a driving
position.
Removing the hatch
After the hatch has been released and the
backrest folded backwards, open the hatch
approx. 30 degrees and pull it straight up.
2
Only applies to comfort seats.
145
05 Loading and storage
||
Attaching the hatch
Roof load
Load retaining eyelets
Refit the hatch in the grooves behind the
upholstery and close the hatch.
The load carriers recommended for roof loads
are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in
order to avoid damage to the car and in order
to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey.
The folding load retaining eyelets3 are used to
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the
cargo area.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 144)
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
05
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. For
information about the maximum allowable
load on the roof, including load carriers
and any space box, Weights (p. 370).
Related information
•
3
146
Number of eyes and their location varies depending on market.
Loading (p. 144)
05 Loading and storage
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which
protrude may cause injury under violent
braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Loading - bag holder
12 V electrical socket, cargo area*
The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place
and prevents them from overturning and
spreading their contents across the cargo
area.
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display
screens, music players and mobile phones.
Related information
Loading (p. 144)
G021463
•
Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.
1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the
floor hatch.
2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure
the carrying handle in the hooks.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 144)
Raise the cover to access the electrical
socket.
•
05
The socket also provides voltage when
the remote control key is not in the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
147
05 Loading and storage
||
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), Emergency puncture repair* (p. 311).
05
148
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
LOCKS AND ALARM
06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
Remote control key - losing
Key memory*
The remote control key is used to start the car
and for locking and unlocking. It contains a
detachable key blade (p. 155) made of metal.
The visible section is available in two versions
so that it is possible to distinguish between
the remote control keys.
If you lose a remote control key then a new
one can be ordered at a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The key memory in the remote control key (p.
150) means that certain settings in the car can
be individually adapted for different people.
The remaining remote control keys must be
taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the
missing remote control key must be erased
from the system as a theft prevention measure. The current number of keys registered to
the car can be checked in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
The key memory function is available in combination with power seat and power rearview
and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors,
driver's seat and steering force can be saved
in the key memory.
The car is supplied with 2 remote control
keys or PCCs* (Personal Car Communicator).
Additional remote control keys can be
ordered - up to 6 can be programmed and
used for the same car.
WARNING
Related information
•
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows and sunroof by removing
the remote control key if the driver leaves
the car.
06
Remote control key with PCC (p. 154) has
increased functionality compared with the
remote control key, see PCC* - unique functions (p. 154).
Related information
•
150
Remote control key - functions (p. 152)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key - functions (p. 152)
Key memory – door mirrors and driver's
seat
The settings are automatically connected to
each respective remote control key, see Key
memory* in remote control key (p. 70) and
Adjustable steering force* (p. 239). After
locking with the remote control key the setting of the combined instrument panel's
theme is also saved in the key, see MY CAR
(p. 103).
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
For cars with the Keyless drive function, see
Keyless drive* (p. 159).
06 Locks and alarm
Indication locking/unlocking adjusting
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key (p. 150) the direction indicators confirm that locking/unlocking was
correctly performed.
•
Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
are folded1 in.
•
Unlocking - two flashes and the door mirrors are folded1 out.
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks are activated once the doors have been
closed.
Immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised
person from starting the car.
Each remote control key (p. 150) has a unique
code. The car can only be started with the
correct remote control key with the correct
code.
The following error messages in the combined instrument panel's information display
are related to the electronic immobiliser:
Message
Specification
Insert
car key
Error when reading the
remote control key during
starting - Remove the key
from the ignition switch, press
it in again and make a new
start attempt.
Car key
not
found
Error reading the remote control key during starting - Try to
start again.
If the error persists: Insert the
remote control key into the
ignition switch and try to start
again.
Selecting the function
Different options for indicating locking/
unlocking with light can be set in the car's
menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
•
•
Immobiliser Try
start
again
Keyless drive* (p. 159)
Alarm indicator (p. 171)
Error in immobiliser system
during starting. If the error
persists: Contact a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
06
For starting the car, see Starting the engine
(p. 246).
Related information
•
1
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system (p. 152)
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
151
06 Locks and alarm
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system
Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking
system makes it possible to track and locate
the car, and to remotely activate the immobiliser to switch off the engine.
Remote control key - functions
The remote control key has functions such as
locking and unlocking the doors.
Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more
information and assistance with activating the
system.
Related information
•
Remote control key with key blade (p.
150)
•
Immobiliser (p. 151)
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
Information
Remote control key, standard version.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
06
Boot lid
Panic function
Function buttons
Locking – Locks the doors and boot lid
while the alarm is activated.
A long press also closes all windows and
sunroof* simultaneously (see also Total airing
function (p. 166)).
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed
using the remote control key, check that
nobody's hands are trapped.
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and boot
lid while the alarm is deactivated.
152
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Locks and alarm
A long press also opens all windows simultaneously (see also Total airing function (p.
166)).
Related information
•
Remote control key with key blade (p.
150)
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the
driver's door only with one press of the button and, after a further press of the button within 10 seconds - unlocking the remaining
doors.
•
•
PCC* - unique functions (p. 154)
Remote control key - range
Remote control key (p. 150) functions have a
range of about 20 metres from the car.
Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
164)
If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
The car can always be locked/unlocked
with the key blade, Detachable key blade unlocking doors (p. 156).
The function can be changed in the menu
system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Approach light duration – Used to
switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For
more information, see Approach light duration
(p. 86).
Boot lid (p. 166) - Unlocks and disarms
the alarm for the boot lid only.
Panic function – Used to attract attention in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to
activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches
off automatically after approx. 3 minutes.
If the remote control key is removed from the
car when the engine is running or key position
(p. 66) I or II is active, and if all doors are
closed, then a warning message is shown in
the information display in the combined
instrument panel and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same time.
The message is extinguished and the audible
reminder signal stops when the remote control key is brought back to the car after
either/or:
•
•
•
06
The remote control key has been inserted
into the ignition switch.
Speed exceeds 30 km/h.
the OK button has been pressed.
Related information
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 152)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
153
06 Locks and alarm
PCC* - unique functions
Using the information button
Remote control key with PCC has extended
functionality compared with remote control
key without PCC (p. 150) in the form of an
information button and indicator lamps.
–
Press the information button
.
> All indicator lamps flash for approximately 7 seconds and the light travels
around on the PCC. This indicates that
information from the car has been
read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is
interrupted.
NOTE
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
Green continuous light – the car is
locked.
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has
travelled around on the PCC), contact a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Yellow continuous light – the car is
unlocked.
Red continuous light – the alarm has
been triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indicator lamps – The alarm was triggered
less than 5 minutes ago.
Information button
06
Indicator lamps
Indicator lamps display information in accordance with the following illustration:
Using the information button enables access
to certain information from the car via the
indicator lamps.
154
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•
PCC* - range (p. 155)
06 Locks and alarm
PCC* - range
The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and
boot lid is approx. 20 m from the car - for
other functions up to approx. 100 m.
If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The information button function may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 160)
Remote control key - range (p. 153)
Detachable key blade
A remote control key (p. 150) contains a
detachable key blade of metal with which
some functions can be activated and some
operations carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable
key blade:
Out of PCC range
•
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the
information to be read then the status the car
was last left in is shown, without the light
travelling around on the PCC.
the driver's door can be opened manually
if central locking cannot be activated with
the remote control key, see Detachable
key blade - unlocking doors (p. 156).
•
the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated (p.
168).
•
access to the glovebox and cargo area
(privacy locking (p. 157)*) can be
blocked.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is
only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking
that shows correct status.
NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when
the information button is used within range
then this may be because the last communication between the PCC and the car was
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
•
06
the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated
(p. 28).
Related information
•
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 152)
Remote control key with key blade (p.
150)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
155
06 Locks and alarm
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching
Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade
(p. 155) is carried out as follows:
Removing the key blade
Related information
•
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
(p. 156)
•
Child safety locks - manual activation (p.
168)
•
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating* (p. 28)
Detachable key blade - unlocking
doors
The detachable key blade (p. 155) can be
used if central locking cannot be activated
with the remote control key (p. 150), e.g. if the
key's battery has run out.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
discharged - then the driver's door can be
opened as follows:
1. Unlock the driver's door with the key
blade in the door handle's lock cylinder.
For illustration and more information, see
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key
blade (p. 162).
NOTE
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
06
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
the remote control key (p. 150).
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.
156
When the door has been unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
For cars with the Keyless system, see
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 162).
Related information
•
Remote control key with key blade (p.
150)
•
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 158)
06 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
Activate/deactivate
G021084
Privacy locking is intended for when the car is
left for service, with a hotel parking valet or
similar. The glovebox is then locked and the
boot lid lock is disconnected from the central
locking - the boot lid cannot be opened with
either the central locking button in the front
doors or the remote control key (p. 150).
Active locks for remote control key, without key
blade and privacy locking activated.
This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activate/
deactivate the alarm (p. 170), to open the
doors and to drive the car.
Active locks for remote control key with key
blade.
The remote control key without key blade can
then be handed over to the service or hotel
staff - the loose key blade is retained by the
car owner.
Activating privacy locking.
To activate privacy locking:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is vertical in the locked
position for privacy locking.
Pull out the key blade. The combined
instrument panel's information display
shows a message at the same time.
06
The glovebox is then locked and the boot lid
can no longer be unlocked with the remote
control key or the central locking button.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
157
06 Locks and alarm
NOTE
Do not reinsert the key blade into the
remote control key, but keep it in a safe
place instead.
•
Deactivation takes place in reverse order.
For information on locking the glovebox only,
see Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 166).
Remote control key/PCC - replacing
the battery
The batteries for the remote control key/PCC
can be replaced.
The batteries for the remote control key/PCC
should be replaced if:
•
the information symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates and the display shows Low battery in remote
control. Please change batteries.
and/or
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within
20 metres from the car.
Opening
06
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up.
158
06 Locks and alarm
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries falling out when it is opened.
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil
UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III,
sub-section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the
factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo
workshop fulfil the above criteria.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their
contact surfaces with your fingers as this
may impair their function.
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries
are secured on the inside of the cover,
with regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
Remove control key (1 battery)
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
IMPORTANT
2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
Make sure that exhausted batteries are
disposed of in a manner which is kind to
the environment.
PCC* (2 batteries)
1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
2. First install one new one with the (+) side
up.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery
with the (+) side down.
Battery type
Keyless drive*
NOTE
Related information
•
Remote control key with key blade (p.
150)
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 152)
Keyless drive, only with PCC (p. 154)2 means
that the car's lock and starting systems can
be operated keylessly.
The Keyless drive function in the PCC allows
the car to be unlocked (p. 162), driven and
locked without the need for a key. You simply
have to have the PCC with you. The system
makes it easier and more convenient to open
the car, e.g. when your hands are full.
Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the
Keyless function. Additional PCCs can be
ordered, see Remote control key with key
blade (p. 150).
The car's electrical system can be set to
three different levels - key position 0, I and II
(p. 67) - with the remote control key.
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 160)
•
Keyless drive* - interference to PCC function (p. 161)
Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely
(p. 160)
06
Use batteries with the designation CR2430,
3V - one in the remote control key and two in
the PCC.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
159
06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* - PCC range
In order to open a door or the boot lid, a PCC
must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres
from the car door handle or boot lid.
The person who wishes to lock or unlock a
door must have the PCC with him or her. It is
not possible to lock or unlock a door if the
PCC is on the opposite side of the car.
When the PCC has been returned to the car,
the warning message goes off and the audible reminder ceases once either/or:
•
•
a door has been opened and closed
•
the OK button has been pressed.
the PCC is inserted into the ignition
switch
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 159)
Keyless drive* - antenna location (p. 164)
Keyless drive* - handling the PCC
safely
It is important to handle all remote control
keys with great care.
If a PCC with keyless function is left in the
car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car
is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
However, if someone breaks into the car and
finds the PCC, it can be reactivated. It is
therefore important to handle all PCCs with
great care.
IMPORTANT
Never leave a PCC in the car.
G020577
Related information
06
The red rings in the above figure indicate the
range covered by the system's antennas.
If all PCCs are removed from the car when
the engine is running or key position I or II (p.
67) is active, and if all doors are closed, then
a warning message is shown in the information display in the combined instrument panel
and an audio reminder signal sounds at the
same time.
2
160
Personal Car Communicator.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
Keyless drive* (p. 159)
06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* - interference to PCC
function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can
interfere with the Keyless function.
Keyless drive* - locking
Related information
Cars with the Keyless-drive system have a
button on the outer door handles for locking/
unlocking.
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 159)
Alarm indicator (p. 171)
NOTE
Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile
phone or metal object - no closer than
10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless,
use the PCC and the key blade as a remote
control key, see Remote control key - functions (p. 152).
Related information
•
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 158)
•
Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely
(p. 160)
•
Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 160)
Cars with the keyless system have a button on
the outside door handles.
Lock the doors and the boot lid by pressing
the lock button on one of the door handles on
the outside.
All doors and the boot lid must be closed
before the car can be locked - otherwise the
car is not locked.
06
NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors,
the gear selector must be set to the P
position; otherwise the car can be neither
locked nor alarmed.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* - unlocking
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a
door handle or the boot lid's rubberised pressure plate is actuated - open the door or boot
lid as normal.
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the
key blade
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and unlock the door.
If central locking cannot be unlocked with the
PCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then
the left-hand front door can be opened with
the PCC's detachable key blade (see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 156)).
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
PCC in the ignition switch, see Alarm remote control key not working (p. 171).
Keyless drive* (p. 159)
Keyless drive* - locking (p. 161)
Related information
•
•
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
06
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also
done with the key blade:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
up into the hole on the underside of the
door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automatically by means of the torque when the
blade is pushed straight up and into
the opening.
162
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless drive* (p. 159)
Alarm (p. 170)
06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* - key memory
memory3
The key
in the PCC means that certain settings in the car can be individually
adapted for different persons.
The key memory function is available in combination with power seat and power rearview
and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors
and driver's seat can be saved in the key
memory.
PCC memory function
If several people each with a PCC approach
the car, then the settings for seat and mirrors
are implemented for the person who opens
the driver's door.
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 159)
Remote control key - functions (p. 152)
Keyless drive* - lock settings
Lock settings for the Keyless function can be
adapted.
Lock settings for the Keyless function can be
adapted by indicating in the menu system for
MY CAR which doors are to be unlocked. For
a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 103).
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 159)
After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with PCC A but person B with
PCC B shall drive, the settings can be
changed as follows:
•
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B
presses their PCC's unlock button, see
Remote control key - functions (p. 152).
•
Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 69).
•
Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see
Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 69)
and Door mirrors (p. 94).
3
06
Only in combination with power driver's seat* and power mirrors.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
163
06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* - antenna location
WARNING
The Keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car.
People who have had a pacemaker operation should not come closer than 22 cm to
the Keyless system's antennas with their
pacemaker. This is to prevent interference
between the pacemaker and the Keyless
system.
Related information
•
Rear bumper, centre
Door handle, left rear
Parcel shelf, centre, underside
06
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
Keyless drive* (p. 159)
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried
out using the remote control key (p. 150). The
remote control key can lock/unlock all doors
and the boot lid simultaneously. Different
sequences for unlocking can be selected, see
Remote control key - functions (p. 152).
In order that the lock sequence can be activated, the driver's door must be closed - if
any of the other doors or the boot lid is open,
then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is
activated only when it/they are closed. With
the Keyless* system all the doors and boot lid
must be closed.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be discharged - lock or unlock the driver's door
with the detachable key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 156).
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered
when the door is opened after being
unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is
switched off when the remote control key
is inserted into the ignition switch.
164
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Locks and alarm
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside
using the remote control key - it is then not
possible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls. For more
information, see Deadlocks* (p. 167).
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
All of the doors and the tailgate are locked or
unlocked simultaneously using the central
locking button on the driver's door and passenger door*.
Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
164)
Press the central locking button
the front doors have been closed.
after
All doors can also be individually locked manually with their lock buttons - the door in
question must then be closed.
Automatic locking
The doors and boot lid are locked automatically when the car starts to move.
Related information
•
•
A long press also closes all side windows and
sunroof simultaneously (see also Total airing
function (p. 166)).
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, all are
locked again automatically. This function
reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked
unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see
Alarm (p. 170).)
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
165)
Locking
Central locking
Automatic relocking
•
Pull the door handle once and release the door is unlocked. Pull the door handle
again to open the door.
Central locking.
•
Press one side
the other side
of the button to lock to unlock.
Press and hold to also open all side windows*
simultaneously.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in
two different ways:
•
Press the central locking button
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
164)
•
•
Alarm (p. 170)
06
Remote control key - functions (p. 152)
.
A long press also opens all the side windows*
simultaneously (see also Total airing function
(p. 166)).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
06 Locks and alarm
Total airing function
Locking/unlocking - glovebox
Locking/unlocking - boot lid
The total airing function opens or closes all
side windows simultaneously and can be
used for example to quickly air the car during
hot weather.
The glovebox (p. 141) can only be locked/
unlocked using the detachable key blade from
the remote control key.
The boot lid can be opened, locked and
unlocked in several ways.
For information on the key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 156).
Central locking button
06
A long press on the
symbol in the central
locking button opens all side windows simultaneously. The same procedure on the
symbol closes all side windows simultaneously.
Locking the glovebox:
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
165)
•
Power windows (p. 92)
•
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
Pull out the key blade.
The doors remain locked and armed.
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
•
For information on privacy locking, see Privacy locking* (p. 157).
166
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed*
and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using
button.
the remote control key's
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm
indicator on the instrument panel stops to
show that alarm for the whole of the car is not
armed. The alarm's level and movement sensors and the sensors for opening the boot lid
are disconnected.
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
Related information
•
Unlocking with the remote control key
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed - press lightly on the rubberised
pressure plate under the outer handle and
lift the tailgate.
06 Locks and alarm
If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes
then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
The boot lid can be opened in two
different ways
One press - The boot lid is unlocked, but
remains closed - press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle
and lift the boot lid.
Deadlocks*
Locking with the remote control key
•
Press the remote control key (p. 152) button for locking
.
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm
indicator on the instrument panel starts to
flash, which means that the alarm is armed.
Unlocking the car from inside
If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes
then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
If a door is opened within the delay time
then the sequence is interrupted and the
alarm is deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key. The
front left door can also be unlocked with the
detachable key blade (p. 155). In addition, it is
possible to unlock/open the doors and boot
lid/tailgate on cars equipped with the Keyless
drive* by touching door handles or the handle
on the boot lid/tailgate.
NOTE
•
When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked
with 2 presses, automatic relocking
does not take place because the boot
lid/tailgate is open - it must be closed
manually.
After the boot lid/tailgate has been
closed it is unlocked and the alarm is
not armed - relock it and re-arm the
alarm with the remote control key's
lock button
.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key (p. 150) and are set after an
approximately 10 second delay after the
doors have been locked.
NOTE
Two presses - The boot lid is unlocked and
the lock is disengaged at which the boot lid
opens about a centimetre - lift the outer handle to open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could
however prevent the tailgate from disengaging from the lock.
•
Deadlocks means that all lock buttons and
door handles are mechanically disengaged,
which prevents doors being opened from
both inside and outside.
To unlock the boot lid:
–
Press the lighting panel button. (1)
> The lock releases and the tailgate
opens by a few centimetres.
06
WARNING
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
165)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
164)
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
167
06 Locks and alarm
||
Temporary deactivation
Related information
•
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key
blade (p. 162)
•
Remote control key with key blade (p.
150)
Child safety locks - manual activation
The child safety locks prevent children from
being able to open a rear door from the
inside.
Activate/deactivate child safety locks
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
G021077
MY CAR
OK MENU
TUNE knob control
EXIT
06
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off. This takes place the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu
system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
NOTE
168
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from
the inside then the alarm is triggered.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only
accessible when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
–
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade (p. 155) to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
06 Locks and alarm
NOTE
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock
do not have a manual child lock.
Related information
•
Child safety locks - electrical activation*
(p. 169)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
165)
•
Child safety locks - electrical
activation*
Child safety locks with electrical activation
prevent children from opening the rear doors
or windows from the inside.
Activation
The child safety locks can be activated/deactivated in all key positions (p. 66) higher than
0. Activation/deactivation can be performed
up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine,
provided that no door is opened.
To activate the child safety locks:
2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel.
> The combined instrument panel's
information display shows the message Rear child locks Activated and
the button's lamp illuminates - the
locks are active.
When the child safety lock is active then the
rear:
•
windows can only be opened with the
driver's door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
The current setting is stored when the engine
is switched off - if the child safety locks are
activated at engine shutdown, the function
will remain activated the next time the engine
is started.
Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
164)
Related information
•
Child safety locks - manual activation (p.
168)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
165)
06
Control panel driver's door.
1. Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
169
06 Locks and alarm
Alarm
NOTE
The alarm is a device that warns in the event
of e.g. a break-in in the car.
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the
sunroof open or if the passenger compartment heater is used.
Activated alarm is triggered if:
•
a door, the bonnet or the boot lid is
opened
•
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
•
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
•
•
the battery's cable is disconnected
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
when leaving the car. If the car's integrated passenger compartment heater (or
a portable electric heater) shall be used direct the airflow from the air vents so that
they are not pointing upwards in the passenger compartment. Alternatively,
reduced alarm level can be used, see
Reduced alarm level (p. 172).
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system then the
information display in the combined instrument panel shows a message. In which case,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any
such attempts may affect the terms of the
insurance.
06
Arming the alarm
–
Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm
–
170
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press the remote control key unlock button.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
–
Press the remote control key unlock button or insert the remote control key in the
ignition switch.
Related information
•
•
•
Alarm indicator (p. 171)
Alarm - automatic re-arming (p. 171)
Alarm - remote control key not working
(p. 171)
06 Locks and alarm
Alarm indicator
Alarm - automatic re-arming
The alarm indicator shows alarm system (p.
170) status.
Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 170) prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of
the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2
minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Related information
•
Reduced alarm level (p. 172)
Alarm - remote control key not
working
If the alarm (p. 170) cannot be deactivated
with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's
battery (p. 158) is discharged - the car can be
unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as
follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade (p. 162).
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indicator (p. 171) flashes rapidly and the
siren sounds.
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
•
•
LED not lit – Alarm not armed
•
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming
the alarm (and until the remote control
key is inserted in the ignition switch and
key position I is selected) – Alarm has
been triggered.
The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed
06
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.
> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.
171
06 Locks and alarm
Alarm signals
Reduced alarm level
When the alarm (p. 170) is triggered a siren
sounds and all direction indicators flash.
Reduced guard means that the movement
and tilt detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its
own battery and works independently of
the car battery.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5
minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm (p.
170) - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or
during transport on a car train or car ferry temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt
detectors.
The procedure is the same as with the temporary disengaging of deadlocks (p. 167)4.
Related information
•
06
4
172
Only in combination with alarm.
Alarm indicator (p. 171)
DRIVER SUPPORT
07 Driver support
Active chassis - Four C*
Operation
Active chassis "Four-C" (Continously
Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the
characteristics of the shock absorbers so that
the car's driving characteristics can be
adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort,
Sport and Advanced.
The stability and traction control system,
DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control),
helps the driver to avoid skidding and
improves the car's traction.
The activation of the system during braking
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The
car may accelerate slower than expected
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Comfort
This setting means that the car is perceived
as being more comfortable on rough and
uneven road surfaces. Shock absorption is
soft and the movement of the body is smooth
and gentle.
Sport
This setting means that the car is perceived
as being more sporty and is recommended
for more active driving. Steering response is
faster than in the Comfort mode. Shock
absorption is harder and the body follows the
road in order to reduce rolling during cornering.
Control buttons.
The required chassis setting is selected using
the centre console buttons. The setting used
when the engine was switched off is re-activated when the engine is next started. The
exception is Advanced - it is restarted as
Sport.
Advanced
07
174
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC)
This setting is only recommended on very
even and smooth road surfaces.
The shock absorbers are optimised for maximum roadholding and rolling in bends is further minimised.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The system consists of the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Active Yaw Control
Spin Control
Traction control system
Engine drag control - EDC
Corner Traction Control - CTC
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
Active Yaw Control
The function checks the driving and brake
force of the wheels individually in order to
stabilise the car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during
acceleration.
07 Driver support
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.
Trailer Stability Assist1
Trailer stability assist (p. 294) function is to
stabilise the car and trailer combination if it
begins to snake. For more information, see
Driving with a trailer (p. 288).
NOTE
The function is deactivated if the driver
selects Sport mode.
Related information
•
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - operation (p. 175)
•
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 176)
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - operation
The stability and traction control system (p.
174) (DSTC - Dynamic Stability & Traction
Control), helps the driver to avoid skidding
and improves the car's traction.
Selection of level - Sport mode
The stability and traction control system is
always activated - it cannot be switched off.
The Sport mode is active until the driver
deselects it or until the engine is switched off
- after the engine is started the next time the
stability and traction control system is back in
its normal mode again.
Related information
•
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 176)
However, the driver can select the Sport
mode, which allows for a more active driving
experience. In Sport mode the system
detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more
active than in normal driving and then allows
controlled skidding with the rear section up to
a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
If the driver interrupts a controlled skid by
releasing the accelerator pedal then the stability and traction control system intervenes
and stabilises the car.
With Sport mode, maximum traction is
obtained if the car has become stuck, or
when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or
deep snow.
07
Sport mode is selected in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
1
Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
175
07 Driver support
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages
Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and
improves the car's traction.
The stability and traction control system (p.
174) (DSTC - Dynamic Stability & Traction
Table
Symbol
Message
Specification
DSTC Temporarily OFF
The system is temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required
The system is disengaged.
•
•
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Message"
There is a text message in the combined instrument panel (p. 55) - Read it!
Constant glow for
2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light.
The system is being activated.
and
Sport mode is activated.
07
Related information
•
176
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - operation (p. 175)
07 Driver support
Road Sign Information (RSI)*
Road sign information (RSI)* operation
WARNING
The road sign information function (RSI –
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
remember which speed-related road signs the
car has passed.
RSI does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable road traffic rules
and regulations are followed.
The road sign information function (RSI –
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
remember which speed-related road signs the
car has passed.
The function is operated as follows
Related information
•
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 177)
•
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 179)
Examples of readable speed related signs2.
The RSI function gives information on current
speed, e.g. that a motorway or road is starting/ending and when overtaking is prohibited.
If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised traffic and a sign showing the maximum
permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to
show the sign symbol for maximum permitted
speed.
2
3
Recorded speed information3.
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
imposed speed, the combined instrument
panel displays the sign as a symbol.
Together with the symbol for
the current speed limit, a
sign showing that overtaking
is prohibited may also be
displayed where appropriate.
07
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
177
07 Driver support
||
End of restriction or motorway
Additional signs
A corresponding road sign is shown in the
combined instrument panel for
approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI
detects a sign that involves the end of a
speed limit - or other speed-related information, e.g. end of a motorway.
Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a
specific distance or at a certain time of day.
The driver's attention is drawn to the situation
by means of a symbol for an additional sign
under the symbol showing speed.
Examples of such signs are:
Examples of additional signs3.
End of all restrictions.
Sometimes different speed limits are signposted for the same road - an additional sign
then indicates the circumstances under which
the different speeds apply. The road section
may be particularly susceptible to accidents
in rain and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
End of motorway.
07
Following which, the sign information is hidden until the next speed-related sign is
detected.
The speed applicable on an
exit is indicated in certain
markets by means of an
additional sign containing an
arrow.
Display of additional information
A symbol for additional sign in the form of an
empty frame under the combined instrument
panel's speed symbol means that the RSI has
detected an additional sign with supplementary information for the current speed limit.
Setting in MY CAR
There are options for RSI in the MY CAR
menu system; see MY CAR (p. 103).
Speed signs linked to this
type of additional sign are displayed only if
the driver is using the direction indicator.
3
178
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
07 Driver support
Road sign information On/Off
exceeded. The function can be activated/
deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For
a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 103).
Related information
The combined instrument panel's speed symbol display can be disabled. The function can
be activated/deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Speed warning
•
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 177)
•
MY CAR (p. 103)
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 179)
Road sign information (RSI)* limitations
The road sign information function (RSI –
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
remember which speed-related road signs the
car has passed. The function has the following limitations.
The RSI function's camera sensor has limitations just like the human eye - read more
about camera sensor limitations (p. 215)).
Signs which indirectly provide information on
a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
function.
Here are several examples of what can disrupt the function:
•
•
•
•
•
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Concealed or poorly positioned signs
Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt.
Related information
The driver can opt to receive a warning when
the applicable speed limit is exceeded by
5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the
symbol showing the applicable maximum
speed temporarily flashing when this speed is
•
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 177)
07
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 177)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
179
07 Driver support
Cruise control*
WARNING
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in
a more relaxed driving on motorways and
long, straight roads in regular traffic flows.
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed and/or suitable
distance.
Overview
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
Cruise control* - managing speed
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed. It is
possible to activate, set or change the speed.
Activating and setting the speed
To enable cruise control:
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The cruise control symbol in the combined instrument panel changes from
WHITE to GREY and shows that the
cruise control is in standby mode.
Related information
•
Cruise control* - managing speed (p.
180)
•
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 181)
•
•
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
182)
At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button
or
.
•
>
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 182)
The current speed is stored in the memory and the combined instrument panel's
marking (5) is illuminated/turns WHITE at
the selected speed.
To activate cruise control:
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument
panel.
Cruise control - On/Off.
NOTE
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
07
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at
speeds below 30 km/h.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol
(GREY = Standby mode).
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
•
Adjust with short presses on
or
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
180
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
•
Hold down the button and release it at
the required speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car
returns to the set speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are
held depressed for several minutes then it
is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
stopped and the engine restarted.
Related information
•
•
Cruise control* (p. 180)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 181)
•
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
182)
•
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 182)
Cruise control* temporary
deactivation and standby mode
Related information
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed. The
function can be temporarily deactivated and
set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
•
•
•
•
Cruise control* (p. 180)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 180)
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
182)
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 182)
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and the symbol (6) change colour
from WHITE to GREY.
.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
•
•
•
•
wheels lose traction
•
the gear selector is moved to neutral
position (automatic gearbox)
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
the foot brake is used
speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
the clutch pedal is held depressed for a
short time - however, a few seconds does
not activate standby mode4
07
The driver must then regulate the speed.
4
Cars with 4-cyl 2.0L engine also allow gear changing.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
181
07 Driver support
Cruise control* - resume set speed
Cruise control* - deactivate
Adaptive cruise control - ACC*
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed. After
temporary deactivation and standby mode (p.
181) it is possible to resume the set speed.
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed. How it
is deactivated is described here.
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from
GREY to WHITE and the speed is then
set to the last speed stored.
.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
The cruise control is deactivated with a steering wheel button (1) or by switching off the
engine - the set speed is deleted from the
memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Related information
•
•
•
07
182
•
Cruise control* (p. 180)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 180)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 181)
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 182)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cruise control* (p. 180)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 180)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 181)
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
182)
The adaptive cruise control provides a more
relaxing driving experience on long journeys
on motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
The driver sets the desired speed (p. 186)
and time interval (p. 187) to the car in front.
When the radar detector detects a slower
vehicle in front of the car, the speed is automatically adapted to that. When the road is
clear again the car returns to the selected
speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off
or set to standby mode (p. 187) and the car
comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the
driver is warned instead by the Distance
Warning (p. 197) function about the short
distance.
07 Driver support
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is
not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in
order to learn about its limitations, of
which the driver should be aware before it
is used.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
185)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
183)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action (p. 194)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 195)
Adaptive cruise control* - function
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. It consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing system.
Function overview
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Automatic gearbox
Function overview5.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad (p. 185)
Radar sensor (p. 191)
07
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue Assist (p. 189).
5
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
07 Driver support
||
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on slip roads.
Distance to the vehicle ahead (p. 187) is
measured primarily by a radar sensor (p.
191). Cruise control regulates the speed with
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a low sound when they are
being used by the adaptive cruise control.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when Cruise Control brakes. Do not rest your foot beneath
the brake pedal as it may become trapped.
07
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time inter6
184
val set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will
instead maintain the cruise control's set
speed. This also happens if the speed of the
vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control's
set speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control
the speed in a smooth way. In situations that
demand sudden braking the driver must
brake himself/herself. This applies with large
differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front
brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar
sensor (p. 192) braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated
to follow another vehicle at speeds from
30 km/h6 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
below 30 km/h or if the engine speed
becomes too low, the cruise control is set in
standby mode (p. 187) at which automatic
braking ceases - the driver must then take
over himself/herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking
capacity that is equivalent to more than 40%
of the car's braking capacity.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily
than cruise control capacity and the driver
Queue Assistant (p. 189) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h.
does not brake, then cruise control uses the
warning lamp and warning sound from the
Collision warning system (p. 207) in order to
alert the driver that immediate intervention is
required.
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to see in
strong sunlight or when wearing sunglasses.
WARNING
Cruise Control warns only of vehicles
which the radar sensor has detected.
Hence the warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay. Do not
wait for a warning without braking when so
required.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control
is primarily intended for use when driving on
level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes,
with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which
case, be extra attentive and ready to slow
down.
07 Driver support
Related information
•
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 195)
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p.
189)
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle (p. 188)
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
(Not used)
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Time distance
07
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode).
Related information
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
183)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed
At the same time a speed
range is marked:
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are
held depressed for several minutes then it
is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
stopped and the engine restarted.
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
To enable cruise control:
•
-a
Press the steering wheel button
similar WHITE symbol illuminates in the
combined instrument panel (8) which
shows that cruise control is in standby
mode (p. 187).
To activate cruise control:
•
>
07
•
the higher speed with the GREEN marking (6) is the pre-programmed speed
•
the lower speed is the speed of the car in
front.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
or
.
wheel button
or
Adjust with short presses on
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
The current speed is stored in the memory, the combined instrument panel
shows a "magnifying glass" around the
selected speed for a second or so and its
marking changes from WHITE to GREEN.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal prior to pressing the
/
button, then it is the car's current speed
when the button is pressed that is stored
in the cruise control.
When this symbol changes colour
from WHITE to GREEN, the cruise
control is active and the car maintains the stored speed.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
Only when the symbol shows
an image of another vehicle
is the distance to the vehicle
in front controlled by the
cruise control.
186
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Hold down the button and release it at
the required speed.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot
be activated. In this case, the combined
instrument panel (p. 195) shows Cruise
control Unavailable.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
185)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
183)
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - set time
interval
The same symbol is also shown when Distance Warning (p. 197) function is activated.
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
combined instrument panel
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corresponds to approximately 1 second to the
vehicle in front, 5 lines
approximately 3 seconds.
To set/change the time distance:
•
Increase or decrease with the steering
wheel buttons
/ .
At low speed, when the distances are short,
the adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. The cruise control can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.
If Cruise Control does not appear to react
when activated, this may be because the
time distance to the car in front is preventing an increase in speed.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
•
To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
control and set it in standby mode:
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Standby mode due to driver intervention
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
185)
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
183)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p.
189)
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if
any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
Press the steering wheel button
This symbol and the stored speed's
marking then change colour from
GREEN to WHITE.
Related information
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle
in front smoothly and comfortably.
7
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode
•
•
the foot brake is used
•
the gear selector is moved to N position
(automatic gearbox)
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer
than 1 minute7
07
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car
Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
07 Driver support
||
returns to the last stored speed when the
accelerator pedal is released.
- the speed is then set to the
wheel button
last stored speed.
Automatic standby mode
NOTE
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, e.g. DSTC (Stability and traction control system) (p. 174). If any of these
systems stop working then cruise control is
automatically deactivated.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
will sound and the message Cruise control
Cancelled is shown in the combined instrument panel. The driver must then intervene
and adapt the speed and distance to the
vehicle ahead.
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
185)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
183)
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
When the car is following another vehicle and
the driver indicates an impending overtaking
manoeuvre with the direction indicator9, the
adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accelerate the car towards the vehicle in front.
This function is active at speeds
above 70 km/h.
WARNING
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
07
the driver takes off his seatbelt
engine speed is too low/high
speed has fallen below 30 km/h8
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Resume set speed
Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is
reactivated with one press on the steering
8
9
188
Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations other than during
overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator
is used to indicate a change of lane or exit
to another road - the car will then accelerate briefly.
the driver opens the door
Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary.
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
185)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
183)
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
With a short press on the steering wheel butthe adaptive cruise control is set in
ton
standby mode (p. 187). With a further short
press it is deactivated. The set speed is
cleared and cannot be resumed with the
button.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
183)
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 195)
Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue
Assist
Extended speed range
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Queue Assist also provides the
Adaptive Cruise Control with enhanced functionality at speeds below 30 km/h..
In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive
cruise control is supplemented with the
Queue Assist function (also referred to as
"Queue Assist").
NOTE
In order to activate the cruise control the
driver's door must be closed and the driver
must be wearing the seatbelt.
With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive
cruise control can follow another vehicle
within the range 0-200 km/h.
NOTE
Activation of the cruise control below
30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a
reasonable distance.
Queue Assistant has the following functions:
•
•
•
•
Extended speed range - also below
30 km/h and when stationary
Change of target
Automatic braking ceases when stationary
Automatic activation parking brake.
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even
though it is capable of following another vehicle down to a standstill, a lower speed cannot be selected.
For shorter stops in connection with inching
in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is
automatically resumed if the stops do not
exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer
before the car in front starts moving again
then the Adaptive cruise control is set in
standby mode with automatic braking. The
driver must then reactivate it in one of the following ways:
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
07
or
•
Depress the accelerator pedal.
>
The cruise control will then resume following the vehicle in front.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
189
07 Driver support
||
NOTE
WARNING
Queue Assist can hold the car stationary
for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the
parking brake is applied and Cruise Control is disengaged.
•
When the cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
30 km/h and the target is changed from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the
cruise control will ignore the stationary
vehicle and instead select the stored
speed.
The driver has to release the parking
brake before the cruise control can be
reactivated.
•
Change of target
The driver must intervene him/herself
and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change
of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then
there may be stationary traffic in front.
07
190
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and
changes target from a moving to a stationary
vehicle, the cruise control will slow down for
the stationary vehicle.
Queue Assist releases the foot brake and sets
the adaptive cruise control in standby mode
in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the driver sets the cruise control in
standby mode.
the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
position
Automatic activation parking brake
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged
and set in standby mode:
In certain situations Queue Assist applies the
parking brake in order to keep the car remaining stationary.
•
This takes place if:
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h and
cruise control is not sure whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some
other object, e.g. a speed bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h and the
vehicle in front turns off so the cruise
control no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Termination of automatic braking at a
standstill
In certain situations, Queue Assist stops
automatic braking at a standstill. This means
that the brakes are released and the car may
start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself in
order to maintain its position.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
the driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seatbelt
•
DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport
mode
•
Queue Assist has held the car stationary
for more than 4 minutes
•
•
the engine is switched off
the brakes have overheated.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
185)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
183)
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - switch
cruise control functionality
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
Changing from ACC to CC
With one press of the button the adaptive
part (spacing system) in the cruise control is
deactivated, at which point the car just follows the set speed.
•
>
Give a long press on the steering wheel
- the combined instrument
button
to
.
panel's symbol changes from
By these means the standard cruise control (p. 180) CC (Cruise
Control) is activated.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Radar sensor
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
185)
The function of the radar sensor is to detect
cars or larger vehicles in the same direction,
in the same lane.
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
183)
The radar sensor is used by the following
functions:
•
•
Adaptive cruise control*
•
Distance Warning*
Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Pedestrian Detection*
Related information
•
•
•
•
Radar sensor - limitations (p. 192)
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Collision warning system* (p. 207)
Distance Warning* (p. 197)
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically
after switching from ACC to CC - it merely
follows the set speed.
Changing back from CC to ACC
Switch off cruise control with 1-2 presses on
in accordance with the deactivation
instructions (p. 189). The next time the system is switched on it is the Adaptive cruise
control that is activated.
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
191
07 Driver support
Radar sensor - limitations
WARNING
A radar sensor (p. 191) has certain limitations,
due to its limited field of vision for example.
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is
not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect
vehicles in front is reduced significantly:
•
if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy
rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sensor.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in
order to learn about its limitations, of
which the driver should be aware before it
is used.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean - see subheading "Maintenance" (p.
212).
•
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
if the speed of vehicles in front is significantly different from your own speed.
WARNING
Field of vision
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
In some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
07
ACC field of vision.
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at
detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g.
a vehicle that drives in between the car
and vehicles in front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
lane can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
192
Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary lamps must not be fitted in front of the
grille.
07 Driver support
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on slip roads.
IMPORTANT
In the event of visible damage to the car's
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sensor may be damaged:
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The function may completely or partially
disappear - or malfunction - if the grille,
the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged
or has loosened.
07
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Collision warning system* (p. 207)
Distance Warning* (p. 197)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
193
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action
The adaptive cruise control (p. 182) (ACC –
Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to
maintain an even speed and a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead.
If the combined instrument panel shows the
message Radar blocked See manual this
means that the radar signals from the radar
sensor (p. 191) are blocked and that vehicles
in front of the car cannot be detected.
In turn this means that - apart from Adaptive
Cruise Control - Distance Warning (p. 197)
and Collision Warning (p. 207) with Auto
Brake are not operating either.
Cause
Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the
radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road
surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
Related information
07
194
The following table presents examples of
possible causes for a message being shown
along with the appropriate action:
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
185)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
183)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 195)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols
and messages
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
Symbol
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Sometimes the adaptive cruise
control may display a symbol and/or text
Message
Specification
The symbol is GREEN
The car maintains the stored speed.
The symbol is WHITE
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
message. Here are several examples - follow
the recommendation given if appropriate:
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
DSTC Normal to enable
Cruise
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC)
(p. 174) has been set in Normal mode.
Cruise control Cancelled
The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
Cruise control Unavailable
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
•
•
Radar blocked See
manual
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
•
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
07
The driver can then choose to switch to (p. 191) normal Cruise control (CC) - a text message provides
information on appropriate alternatives.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 192).
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
195
07 Driver support
||
Symbol
Message
Specification
Cruise control Service
required
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
Press Brake To hold +
acoustic alarm
The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to take
over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.
(Only with Queue Assistant)
•
Below 30 km/h Only following
Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in front
within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver
depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
(Only with Queue Assistant)
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 182)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
185)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
183)
07
196
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
Distance Warning*
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function
that informs the driver about the time interval
to vehicles in front.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control is active.
tion is handled by the car's menu system MY
CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Set time interval
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value - the speed of the driver's
vehicle is not affected.
Operation
Controls and symbol for time interval.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On.
Orange-coloured warning lamp12.
An orange-coloured warning lamp in the
windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if
the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter
than the set time interval.
Press the button in the centre console to
switch the function on or off. The function is
switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the
button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in
the centre console - in which case the func-
12
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
combined instrument panel
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corresponds to approximately 1 second to the
vehicle in front, 5 lines
approximately 3 seconds.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
197
07 Driver support
||
The same symbol is also shown when adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
Distance Warning* - limitations
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function
that informs the driver about the distance to
vehicles in front. The function uses the same
radar sensor as the Adaptive cruise control (p.
182) and Collision warning with auto brake (p.
207), has some limitations.
The set time interval is also used by the
function adaptive cruise control (p. 183).
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong variations in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
Related information
•
Poor weather or winding roads could
affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect
vehicles in front.
Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 198)
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance
than that set due to limitations in sensor
range.
07
For further information on radar sensor limitations, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 192)
and (p. 213).
Related information
•
•
198
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Distance Warning* (p. 197)
Distance Warning* - symbols and messages (p. 199)
07 Driver support
Distance Warning* - symbols and
messages
to vehicles in front. The function has certain
limitations.
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function
that informs the driver about the time interval
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush has
collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 192).
Collision warn.
Service required
A
Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
•
Distance Warning* (p. 197)
Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 198)
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
199
07 Driver support
City Safety™
IMPORTANT
City Safety™ is a function for helping the
driver to avoid a collision when driving in
queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
attention, could lead to an incident.
Maintenance and replacement of City
Safety™ components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The City Safety™ function is active at speeds
under 50 km/h and it helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front,
should the driver not react in time by braking
and/or steering away.
City Safety™ does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road
conditions.
WARNING
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
driving in a different direction from the car,
to small vehicles and motorcycles or to
humans and animals.
City Safety™ is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possible to reduce collision speed. In order to
obtain full brake function, the driver must
depress the brake pedal.
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or
later.
07
The driver or passengers normally only notice
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the
car is extremely close to being in a collision.
If the car is also equipped with Collision
Warning with Auto Brake (p. 207)* these two
systems complement each other.
200
Never wait for City Safety™ to engage.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the proper distance and
speed.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 202)
City Safety™ - function (p. 200)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 201)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 204)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
206)
City Safety™ - function
City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge
of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk
of collision, City Safety™ will automatically
brake the car, which may be experienced as
sudden braking.
07 Driver support
When the function is activated and brakes,
the combined instrument panel shows a text
message to the effect that the function is/has
been active.
NOTE
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake
lights come on.
Related information
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window13.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation
to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can
completely prevent a collision.
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking
and stops the car in normal circumstances,
just behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well outside normal driving style
and may be experienced as being uncomfortable.
•
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 202)
City Safety™ (p. 200)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 201)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 204)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
206)
If the difference in speed between the vehicles is greater than 15 km/h then City
Safety™ may not prevent the collision on its
own. To obtain full brake force, the driver
must depress the brake pedal. This could
then make it possible to prevent a collision,
even at speed differences above 15 km/h.
13
City Safety™ - operation
City Safety™ is a function for helping the
driver to avoid a collision when driving in
queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
attention, could lead to an incident.
On and Off
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is always
switched on after the engine has been
started via key position I and II (p. 67).
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches
could sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
After starting the engine City Safety™ can be
deactivated as follows: The function can be
activated/deactivated in the menu system MY
CAR. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 103).
However, the function will be enabled the
next time the engine is started, regardless of
whether the system was enabled or disabled
when the engine was switched off.
07
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
201
07 Driver support
||
WARNING
The laser sensor also transmits laser light
when City Safety™ is disabled manually.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 200)
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 202)
City Safety™ - function (p. 200)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 204)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
206)
MY CAR (p. 103)
City Safety™ - limitations
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to
detect cars and other large vehicles in front of
the car irrespective of whether it is day or
night. However, the function has a number of
limitations.
However, the sensor has limitations and has
poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g.
heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust
storms or white-out situations. Mist, dirt, ice
or snow on the windscreen may disrupt the
function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than
the bonnet limit the function.
The laser beam from the sensor in City
Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
The sensor cannot detect objects with low
reflection capacity. The rear sections of the
vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently
thanks to the number plate and rear light
reflectors.
07
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity of City Safety™ to avoid a collision.
In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force
with maintained stability.
When your own car is reversing, City Safety™
is temporarily deactivated.
202
City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised,
which is why City Safety™ does not intervene
in situations where the driver is steering or
accelerating in a clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine
stops when City Safety™ has stopped the
car, unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand.
NOTE
•
Keep the windscreen surface in front
of the laser sensor free from ice, snow
and dirt (see the illustration for sensor
location (p. 200)).
•
Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor
•
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet
- snow and ice must not exceed a
height of 5 cm.
07 Driver support
Fault tracing and action
If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked is shown in the combined instru-
IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone
chips in the windscreen in front of either of
the laser sensor's "windows" and they
cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm
(or larger), then a workshop must be contacted for replacement of the windscreen
(see the illustration for sensor location (p.
200)) - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
ment panel it indicates that the laser sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of
the car. This means in turn that City Safety™
is not operational.
The Windscreen Sensors blocked message
is not shown for all situations in which the
laser sensor is blocked. The driver must
therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor
clean.
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the
laser sensor is dirty or
covered with ice or
snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor field
of vision is blocked.
Remove the
blocking object.
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 204)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
206)
Failure to take action may result in
reduced performance for City Safety™.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation for City Safety™, the
following also applies:
The following table presents possible causes
for the message being shown, along with
suggestions for appropriate action.
Cause
•
•
•
Volvo recommends that you do not
repair cracks, scratches or stone chips
in the area in front of the laser sensor instead, the whole windscreen should
be replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to
verify that the correct windscreen is
ordered and fitted.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement.
07
Related information
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 200)
City Safety™ - function (p. 200)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 201)
203
07 Driver support
City Safety™ - laser sensor
The City Safety™ function includes a sensor
which transmits laser light (see illustration (p.
200) for sensor location). Contact a qualified
workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser
sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. It is absolutely
essential to follow the prescribed instructions
when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels relate to the laser
sensor:
•
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration)
standards for laser product design with
the exception of deviations in accordance
with "Laser Notice No. 50" from
26 July 2001.
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer
with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar optical instruments.
•
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sensor's spare parts must only be carried
out by a qualified workshop - we recommend an authorised Volvo workshop.
•
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than
those specified here.
•
The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
laser sensor.
•
Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A
removed laser sensor does not fulfil
laser class 3B as per standard IEC
60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eyesafe and therefore entails a risk of
injury.
•
The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the
windscreen.
The following table specifies the laser sensor's physical data.
Maximum pulse energy
2.64 µJ
Maximum average output
45 mW
Divergence (horizontal x vertical)
33 ns
28° × 12°
The upper label in the figure describes the
laser beam's classification:
•
Laser radiation - Do not look into the
laser beam with optical instruments Class 1M laser product.
The lower label in the figure describes the
laser beam's physical data:
204
•
Radiation data for the laser sensor
Pulse duration
07
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed
then there is a risk of eye injury!
07 Driver support
•
The laser sensor must be fitted onto
the windscreen before the sensor's
connector is plugged in.
•
The laser sensor transmits a laser light
when the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 67) even if the engine is
switched off.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 200)
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 202)
City Safety™ - function (p. 200)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 201)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
206)
07
205
07 Driver support
City Safety™ - symbols and
messages
symbols may illuminate in the combined
instrument panel and a text message may be
shown. A text message can be acknowledged
In conjunction with automatic braking by the
City Safety™ (p. 200) system, one or more
Symbol
by briefly pressing the OK button on the
direction indicator stalk.
Message
Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety
City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
•
Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about laser sensor limitations (p. 202).
City Safety Service required
City Safety™ is not operational.
•
Related information
07
206
•
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 200)
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 202)
City Safety™ - function (p. 200)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 201)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 204)
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
07 Driver support
Collision warning system*14
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
two variants, depending on how the car is
equipped:
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 213)
Level 1
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 215)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 217)
warned15
The driver is merely
of occurring
obstacles by means of visual and acoustic
signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the
driver must himself brake.
Level 2
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles
by means of visual and acoustic signals - the
car is braked automatically if the driver himself does not act within a reasonable time.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of components included in
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection must only be carried
out in a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection may prevent a collision or
reduce the collision speed.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection must not be used as an
excuse for the driver to change his/her driving
style. If the driver solely relies on Collision
Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking,
there will be a collision sooner or later.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* - function (p.
208)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 211)
Two system levels
•
The Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection function is available in
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 209)
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
212)
14
15
07
Not available as an option for certain engines.
No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
207
07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - function
3. Auto Brake17
3 - Auto Brake17
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
The collision warning system and City
Safety™ (p. 200) complement each other.
The automatic brake function is activated
last.
1 - Collision warning
If in this situation the driver has not yet
started to take evasive action and the risk of
collision is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place
irrespective of whether or not the driver
brakes. Braking then takes place with full
brake force in order to reduce collision speed,
or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to
avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and
full brake intervention may come very late or
simultaneously.
The driver is first warned of a potentially
imminent collision.
The collision warning system detects pedestrians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles
driving in the same direction in front of the
car.
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian
or a vehicle then the driver's attention is
attracted with a flashing red warning signal (1)
and an acoustic signal.
2 - Brake support17
Function overview16.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event
of a collision risk.
Radar sensor17
07
Camera sensor
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes
three steps in the following order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support17
16
17
208
If the risk of collision has increased further
after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.
This means that the brake system is prepared
for rapid braking by applying the brakes
lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented.
Brake support also reinforces the driver's
braking if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
With system Level 2 only.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
WARNING
The collision warning system does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision
warning system does not react to vehicles
or cyclists driving in another direction to
the car or to animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a
high risk for collision. This section "Function" and the section "Limitations" inform
about limitations that the driver must be
aware of before using the Collision Warning system with Auto Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at
a vehicle speed exceeding 80 km/h.
Collision warning system* - cyclist
detection
Related information
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 207)
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 211)
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 209)
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
212)
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 213)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 215)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 217)
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists do not work in
darkness and tunnels - not even when
streetlights are lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. To ensure
full brake performance, the driver should
always depress the brake pedal - even
when the car auto-brakes.
Never wait for a collision warning. The
driver is always responsible that the correct distance and speed are maintained even when the collision warning system
with auto-brake is used.
Optimum examples of what the system interprets
as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle contours, directly from behind and in the car's centre line.
Optimal performance of the system requires
that the system function that detects a cyclist
receives as unambiguous information as possible about the body and bicycle contours this implies the opportunity to identify the
bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper
and lower body combined with a normal
human pattern of movement.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07
209
07 Driver support
||
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle
are not visible to the function's camera then
the system cannot detect a cyclist.
•
The function's capacity to detect cyclists
at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the
human eye.
Related information
•
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 211)
The function's capacity to detect cyclists
is deactivated when driving in darkness
and tunnels - even when streetlights are
lit.
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 207)
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
212)
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 213)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 215)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 217)
•
For optimum bicycle detection, the City
Safety™ function must be activated, City
Safety™ (p. 200).
WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance.
The function can only "see" cyclists from behind,
who are travelling in the same direction.
•
•
07
The bicycle must be equipped with a
highly visible and approved19 rearwardfacing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm
above the roadway.
•
The function can only detect cyclists
directly from behind and who are travelling in the same direction - not at an
angle from behind, not from the side.
•
Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand
edge of the car's imagined/extended side
lines may be detected late or not at all.
19
210
For the function to be able to detect a
cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding a "senior bicycle".
The function cannot detect:
•
all cyclists in all situations and does
not see partially obscured cyclists, for
example.
•
cyclists in clothing that obscures the
contours of the body or who are
approaching from the side.
•
bicycles that have no rearward-facing
red reflector.
• bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven properly and with a safety
distance adapted to the speed.
The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Collision warning system* - function (p.
208)
07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - detection
of pedestrians
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
If large parts of the body are not visible to the
camera then the system cannot detect a
pedestrian.
•
Related information
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 207)
Collision warning system* - function (p.
208)
In order for a pedestrian to be detected
he/she must appear full-length and have
a height of at least 80 cm.
•
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
212)
The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying larger items.
•
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 209)
The camera sensor's ability to see pedestrians at dusk and dawn is limited - just
like the human eye.
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 213)
•
The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 215)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 217)
WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection is an assistance tool.
Optimal examples of what the system regards as
pedestrians with clear body contours.
Optimal performance of the system requires
that the system function that detects pedestrians receives as unambiguous information
as possible about the contours of the body this implies the opportunity to identify the
head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower
body combined with a normal human pattern
of movement.
This function cannot detect all pedestrians
in all situations and it cannot see e.g. partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides the contours of the body or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
•
The driver is always responsible that
the vehicle is driven properly and with
a safety distance adapted to the
speed.
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
211
07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - operation
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
The warning sound can be activated/deactivated separately in the menu system MY
CAR. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 103).
Warning signals On and Off
Set warning distance
When starting the engine, the setting that was
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions are always enabled - they cannot be
deactivated.
Light and acoustic signals
Both the light and acoustic signals can be
deactivated after starting the engine. The
function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
212
Acoustic signal
Settings for the collision warning system are
made from MY CAR via the centre console
screen and menu system, see MY CAR (p.
103).
You can select whether the collision warning
system's acoustic and visual warning signals
should be switched on or off.
07
The warning lamp (see (1) in the illustration (p.
208)) is tested each time the engine is started
by briefly lighting the separate light points of
the warning lamp if the visual and acoustic
warning of the collision warning system is
activated.
The warning distance regulates the distance
at which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed. The warning distance is set in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
The warning distance determines the system's sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an earlier warning. First test with Long
and if this setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in
certain situations, then change to warning
distance Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in exceptional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use
the warning lamp and warning sound will
be used by the cruise control even if the
collision warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the
driver in the event of a risk of a collision,
but the function cannot shorten driver
reaction time.
In order for the collision warning system to
be effective, always drive with Distance
Warning (p. 197) set at time interval 4–5.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set
to Long warnings could be perceived as
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
there are large differences in speed or if
vehicles in front brake heavily.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee
100 % correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test Collision Warning
with Auto Brake by driving at people or
vehicles - this may cause severe damage
and injury and risk lives.
Checking settings
The settings required can be controlled on
the centre console display screen. Search
with the menu system (p. 103) MY CAR.
07 Driver support
Maintenance
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 209)
•
Collision warning system* - general
limitations
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 213)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 215)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 217)
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
The function has certain limitations - for
example, it is not active until approx. 4 km/h..
Camera and radar sensor22.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must
be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be
cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
will reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
The collision warning system's visual warning
signal (see (1) in the illustration (p. 208)) may
be difficult to notice in the event of strong
sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are
being worn or if the driver is not looking
straight ahead. The warning sound should
therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide
best possible braking force with maintained
stability.
Related information
•
•
•
22
07
Collision warning system* (p. 207)
Collision warning system* - function (p.
208)
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 211)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
213
07 Driver support
||
NOTE
WARNING
The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
then the warning sound is activated even if
it is deactivated in the menu system.
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic
situation or external influences mean that
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect
a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front
correctly.
•
The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians and cyclists24 - the system
can provide effective warnings and brake
interventions for them at vehicle speeds up
to 50 km/h. For stationary or slow-moving
vehicles, warnings and brake interventions
are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h.
Warnings may not appear if the distance to the vehicle in front is small or
if steering wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at
vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as the Adaptive cruise control
(p. 182). Read more about radar sensor limitations (p. 192).
07
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance
can be reduced (p. 212). This would lead to
the system warning at a later stage, which
reduces the total number of warnings.
24
214
For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not activated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is
why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle
in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
In situations where the driver demonstrates
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision
warning may be postponed slightly in order to
keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine
stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car,
unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand.
Related information
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 207)
Collision warning system* - function (p.
208)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 211)
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 209)
07 Driver support
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
212)
•
Collision warning system* - camera
sensor limitations
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 215)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 217)
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
The function uses the car's camera sensor,
which has certain limitations.
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as
well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake
- by the functions:
•
Automatic main/dipped beam dimming (p. 80)
•
•
•
Road sign information (p. 177)
darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick
fog for example. Under such conditions the
functions of camera-dependent systems
could be significantly reduced or temporarily
disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface,
dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings
could also significantly reduce camera sensor
function when it is used to scan the carriageway and detect pedestrians and other vehicles.
The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and
vehicles cannot be detected in some situations, or they are detected later than anticipated.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 219)
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 223)
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the
windscreen in front of the camera sensor
as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
one or more of the systems dependent on
the camera to stop working.
The camera sensors have limitations similar
to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message
Windscreen Sensors blocked then this
means that the camera sensor is blocked and
cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles
or road markings in front of the car.
07
At the same time, this means that - besides
Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Automatic main/dipped beam dimming, Road sign
information, Driver Alert Control and Lane
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
215
07 Driver support
||
Departure Warning functions will not have full
functionality either.
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
07
216
Cause
Action
The windscreen
surface in front of
the camera is dirty
or covered with ice
or snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the camera
from dirt, ice and
snow.
Thick fog, heavy
rain or snow means
that the camera
does not work sufficiently well.
No action. At times
the camera does
not work during
heavy rain or snowfall.
Cause
Action
The windscreen
surface in front of
the camera has
been cleaned but
the message
remains.
Wait. It may take
several minutes for
the camera to
measure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside
of the windscreen
and the camera.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen inside the
camera cover
cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 207)
Collision warning system* - function (p.
208)
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 209)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 211)
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
212)
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 213)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 217)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - symbols
and messages
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
SymbolA
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
Message
Specification
Collis'n warning
OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warn.
Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto braking was
activated
Auto Brake has been active.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
The message clears after one press of the OK button.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 215).
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
217
07 Driver support
||
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if
slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 192).
Collision warn.
Service required
A
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
•
07
218
Collision warning system* (p. 207)
Collision warning system* - function (p.
208)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 211)
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 209)
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
212)
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 213)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 215)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
Driver Alert System*28
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
Related information
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are
driving on.
•
•
•
The Driver Alert System consists of different
functions which can either be switched on at
the same time or individually:
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p.
220)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 223)
•
•
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 220).
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 219)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 221)
The DAC function is intended to attract the
driver's attention when he/she starts to drive
less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly
deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
Lane Departure Warning - LDW (p. 223).
A switched-on function is set in standby
mode and is not activated automatically until
speed exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h.
Both functions use a camera which is
dependent on the lane having side markings
painted on each side.
WARNING
Driver Alert System does not work in all
situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
28
A camera detects the side markings painted
on the carriageway and compares the section
of the road with the driver's steering wheel
movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle
does not follow the carriageway evenly.
07
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there
may not be any warning issued for the driver.
Not available as an option for certain engines.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
219
07 Driver support
||
For this reason it is always important to stop
and take a break in the event of any signs of
driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not
DAC issues a warning.
NOTE
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
Settings are made from the centre console
display screen and its menu system. For information on how the menu system is used, see
MY CAR (p. 103).
The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at
regular intervals, and make sure you are
well rested.
If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the driver is notified by an
acoustic signal plus the text message Driver Alert Time for a break
- the linked symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel at the same time. The
warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
•
Limitation
WARNING
In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
•
•
in strong side winds
The camera sensor has certain limitations
(p. 215).
Related information
07
•
•
•
220
An alarm should be taken very seriously,
as a sleepy driver is often not aware of
his/her own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of
tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as
soon as possible and rest.
on rutted road surfaces.
NOTE
Driver Alert System* (p. 219)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p.
220)
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
Car with LDW can show this on the screen.
The Driver Alert function can be set in
standby mode. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY
CAR. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 103).
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h and remains active as long as the
speed is over 60 km/h.
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 221)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Studies have shown that it is equally as
dangerous to drive while tired as it is under
the influence of alcohol.
Related information
•
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 219)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 219)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 221)
07 Driver support
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols
and messages
or in the centre console's display screen in
different situations.
DAC (p. 219) can show symbols and text
messages on the combined instrument panel
Combined instrument panel
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 215).
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
A
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Display
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Driver Alert OFF
The function is disengaged.
Driver Alert Available
The function is activated.
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
221
07 Driver support
||
SymbolA
A
Message
Specification
Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Driver Alert Unavailable
The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 215).
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 219)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 219)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p.
220)
07
222
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
Lane Departure Warning is one of the functions in the Driver Alert System - sometimes
also referred to as LDW (Lane Departure
Warning).
The function is intended for use on motorways and similar major roads in order to
reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally
leaving its own lane in certain situations.
Principle for LDW
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) function
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time
the wheels cross a line. So there is no
acoustic alarm when there is a line
between the car's wheels.
Certain settings can be made for the Lane
Departure Warning function.
Off & On
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 219)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 223)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation (p. 224)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 226)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 225)
LDW is engaged or disengaged using a button on the centre console. An indicator lamp
in the button illuminates when the function is
switched on.
(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)
LDW consists of a camera that detects the
side lines painted on the road/lane.
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand
side line of the carriageway without due
cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic
signal.
This function is complemented in the combined instrument panel with intuitive graphics
in different situations.
Personal preferences
07
Settings are made from the centre console's
screen via the menu system in MY CAR. For
a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 103).
Select from the options:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
223
07 Driver support
||
• On at start-up - The function enters
standby mode every time the engine is
started. Otherwise the same value as
when the engine was switched off is
obtained.
• Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) operation
LDW is complemented in the combined
instrument panel with intuitive graphics in different situations. Here are some examples:
increases, an alarm is triggered earlier
and fewer limitations apply.
Related information
•
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 223)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation (p. 224)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 226)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 225)
The LDW function's side lines (marked in red in
the figure).
07
224
•
The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines the function is active and detects/"sees"
one side line, or both.
•
The LDW symbol has GREY side lines the function is active but detects neither
left nor right side line.
or
•
The LDW symbol has GREY side lines the function is in standby mode because
the speed is below 65 km/h.
•
The LDW symbol has no side lines - the
function is deactivated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 223)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 223)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 226)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 225)
07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) limitations
The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is
restricted in a similar way to the human eye.
For more information, read about camera
sensor limitations (p. 215).
NOTE
There are some situations where LDW
does not give any warning, such as:
•
•
Direction indicators are switched on
The driver has his/her foot on the
brake pedal33
•
In the event of rapid depression of the
accelerator pedal33
•
In the event of rapid steering wheel
movements33
•
If turning is so sharp that the car rolls.
Related information
•
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 223)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation (p. 224)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 226)
33
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 223)
07
When "Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 223).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
225
07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) symbols and messages
In situations where there is no LDW function a
symbol may be shown in the combined
SymbolA
instrument panel in combination with an
explanatory message - follow the recommendation given if appropriate.
Message
Specification
Lane departure warning ON/
Lane departure warning OFF
The function is switched on/off.
Message examples:
Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after 5 seconds.
Lane Depart. Warning Unavailable at this speed
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Lane Depart. Warning Unavailable
The lane does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 215).
Lane Depart. Warning Available
The function scans the lane's side markings.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 215).
07
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
A
226
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
07 Driver support
Related information
•
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 223)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 223)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation (p. 224)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 225)
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
227
07 Driver support
Park Assist*
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal
using the centre console's VOL knob or in the
car's menu system (p. 103) MY CAR.
Related information
•
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 231)
•
•
•
•
•
Park assist syst* - function (p. 228)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 230)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 231)
Park assist syst* - function
The parking assistance system is automatically activated when the engine is started the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
parking assistance is switched off with the
button, the lamp goes out.
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 229)
Park assist camera (p. 232)
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
•
•
Rear only
Both front and rear.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the
towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space.
On/Off for parking assistance.
WARNING
•
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
•
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of e.g. people or animals
near the car.
07
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left
front and right rear.
228
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
The centre console's display screen shows
an overview of the relationship between the
car and detected obstacle.
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or
low barriers may be in the "signal shadow"
and are then temporarily not detected by
the sensors - the pulsating tone may then
unexpectedly stop instead of changing
over to the expected constant tone.
Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the
car symbol a selected sector box is, the
shorter the distance between the car and a
detected obstacle.
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
The sensors cannot detect high objects,
such as projecting loading docks.
•
In such situations, pay extra attention
and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current
parking manoeuvre - there may be a
high risk of damage to vehicles or
other objects since the sensors are
temporarily unable to function optimally.
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
loudspeakers.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 228)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 231)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 230)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 231)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 229)
Park assist camera (p. 232)
G021423
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio
system is muted automatically.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the active sensor's field nearest
the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is
within the distance for the constant tone both
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
Park assist syst* - backward
IMPORTANT
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the towbar, rear parking assistance is switched off
automatically - otherwise the sensors would
react to the trailer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07
229
07 Driver support
||
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike
carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may
need to be switched off manually in order
that the sensors do not react to them.
Related information
•
•
07
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived
as an obstacle.
Park assist syst* - function (p. 228)
Related information
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 230)
•
•
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 231)
Park assist camera (p. 232)
The distance covered in front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles in front comes from one of the front
loudspeakers.
Front park assist is active up to
approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is
illuminated in order to indicate that the system is activated. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.
230
NOTE
Front parking assistance is deactivated
when the parking brake is applied or P
mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
The parking assistance system is automatically activated when the engine is started the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
parking assistance is switched off with the
button, the lamp goes out.
G021424
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 228)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 231)
Park assist syst* - forward
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 228)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 231)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 228)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 231)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 229)
Park assist camera (p. 232)
07 Driver support
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's
information symbol illuminates with
constant glow and the text message
Park assist syst Service required is shown
then parking assistance is disengaged.
Park assist syst* - cleaning the
sensors
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
G021425
Park assist syst* - fault indication
IMPORTANT
Sensor location, rear.
In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external
sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works
with.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may cause incorrect warning signals.
Related information
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 228)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 231)
Sensor location, front.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 228)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 228)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 230)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 231)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 229)
Park assist camera (p. 232)
07
Park assist syst* - function (p. 228)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 230)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 229)
Park assist camera (p. 232)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
231
07 Driver support
Park assist camera
Function and operation
The parking camera is an assist system and is
activated when reverse gear is engaged (can
be changed in the settings menu (p. 234)).
The camera image is shown on the centre
console's screen.
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors* then their information is displayed graphically as coloured fields in order
to illustrate the distance to detected obstacles, see the heading "Cars with reversing
sensors" later in the text.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the
towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space.
07
CAM button location.
WARNING
•
The camera shows what is behind the car
and if something appears from the sides.
The parking camera serves as an aid.
It does not relieve the driver of responsibility when reversing.
The camera shows a wide area behind the
car and part of the bumper and any towbar.
•
The camera has blind spots, where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of people and animals in the
vicinity of the car.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h forward or
35 km/h backward.
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt
slightly - this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be
closer to the car than they appear to be on
the screen.
If another view is active the parking camera
system takes over automatically and the
camera image is displayed on the screen.
When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate
232
where the car's approximate external dimensions will be with the current steering wheel
angle, this facilitates tight parking, reversing
into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer.
These park assist lines can be switched off in
the settings menu.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Camera location next to the opening handle.
07 Driver support
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly
in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a slightly reduced image
quality.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow
and ice to ensure optimum function. This
is particularly important in poor light.
Park assist lines
ment, which shows the driver the path the car
will then take - also when the car is turning.
Boundary lines
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car,
the lines on the display show the route
the car will take - not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no lines when a
trailer is connected electrically to the
car's electrical system.
•
The parking camera is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if a
Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
IMPORTANT
Bear in mind that the screen only shows
the area behind the car - pay attention to
the sides and front of the car when
manoeuvring during reversing.
The system's lines.
Boundary line, 30 cm zone backwards
from the car
Boundary line, free reversing zone
The red line (1) frames in a zone about 30 cm
back from the bumper.
The yellow horizontal line (2) frames in a zone
up to about 1.5 m behind the bumper.
The yellow side lines end about 2.0 m behind
the bumper.
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver.
The boundary lines include the car's most
protruding parts, e.g. door mirrors and corners - also when the car is turning.
07
The lines on the screen are projected as if
they were at ground level behind the car and
are directly related to steering wheel move}}
233
07 Driver support
||
Cars with reversing sensors*
Related information
•
•
•
Park assist camera - settings (p. 234)
Park assist camera - settings
Park assist camera - limitations (p. 235)
The parking camera is an assist system and is
activated when reverse gear is engaged.
Park Assist* (p. 228)
Settings
To change the settings for the parking camera:
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown.
2. Turn to reach the desired option with OK/
MENU.
3. Press OK/MENU and back out with EXIT.
Coloured areas (x 4, one per sensor) show distance.
07
or
1. Press CAM.
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors (p. 228) the distance indication
will be more precise and the coloured areas
show which of the 4 sensors is/are registering
an obstacle.
4. Press OK/MENU and back out with EXIT.
The colour of the areas changes with
decreasing distance to the obstacle - from
green to yellow to red.
The default setting is that the camera is activated when reverse gear is engaged.
Colour / paint
Distance (metres)
Green
0.8–1.5
Yellow
0,4–0,8
Red
0–0.4
2. Press OK/MENU.
3. Turn to reach the desired option with OK/
MENU.
Miscellaneous
•
One press on CAM activates the camera
even if reverse gear is not engaged.
•
If the car has several cameras* installed
then cameras are alternated between by
pressing CAM or turning TUNE.
Related information
•
•
234
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Park assist camera (p. 232)
Park assist camera - limitations (p. 235)
07 Driver support
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 228)
Park assist camera - limitations
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System)
MY CAR (p. 103)
The parking camera is an assist system and is
activated when reverse gear is engaged.
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a
camera-based information system that under
certain conditions can help the driver to
notice vehicles moving in the same direction
as the host vehicle in the so-called "blind
spot".
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted
on the rear of the car could obscure the
camera's view.
To bear in mind
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
only looks like a relatively small part of the
image is obscured, it could be a relatively
large sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they
are very close to the car.
•
Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice
and snow.
•
Clean the camera lens regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - take care
not to scratch the lens.
The system is designed to work most effectively when driving in dense traffic on multilane highways.
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a
replacement for, a safe driving style and
use of the rearview mirrors. It can never
replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes
safely always rests with the driver.
Related information
•
•
•
Park assist camera (p. 232)
Park assist camera - settings (p. 234)
07
Park Assist* (p. 228)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
235
07 Driver support
||
Overview
sponge. Clean the lenses carefully so that
they are not scratched.
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt
ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow
away from the lenses.
Related information
G021426
•
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) operation (p. 236)
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System)
- operation
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a
function designed for providing support for
the driver when driving in dense traffic on
roads with several lanes in the same direction.
Activate/deactivate BLIS
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash
three times when BLIS is activated.
Rearview mirror with BLIS function34.
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at
the same time then both lamps illuminate.
07
Maintenance
In order to work most effectively the BLIS
camera lenses35 must be clean. The lenses
can be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp
34
35
236
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
See (1) in the preceding illustration.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Button for activating/deactivating.
The system can be deactivated/activated
after starting the engine with one press on the
BLIS button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in
the centre console - in which case the func-
07 Driver support
tion is handled by the car's menu system (p.
103) MY CAR.
When BLIS is deactivated, the lamp in the
button extinguishes and a message is shown
in the combined instrument panel.
When BLIS is activated the lamp in the button
illuminates, the combined instrument panel
shows a new text message and the indicator
lamps in the door panels flash 3 times. Press
the left-hand stalk switch OK button in order
to switch off the text message.
When BLIS operates
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a
fault arises in the system. If, for example, the
system's cameras are obscured then the
BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is
shown in the combined instrument panel. In
such cases, check and clean the lenses.
If necessary, the system can be switched off
temporarily, see "Activate/deactivate BLIS"
above.
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if:
•
you overtake another vehicle at a speed
of up to 10 km/h faster than the other
vehicle
•
you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling
up to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is
reversing.
A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3.0 m.
The system operates when the car is driven
at a speed above 10 km/h.
When a camera (1) has detected a vehicle
inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp
(2) illuminates with a constant glow, see overview illustration (p. 235).
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can
prevent the vehicle in the screened area
from being detected by BLIS.
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the headlamps of surrounding vehicles. If the headlamps of surrounding vehicles are not
switched on then the system does not detect
the vehicles. This means for example that the
system does not react to a trailer without
headlamps which is towed behind a car or
truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to cyclists or
moped riders.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar
to those of the human eye, i.e. they do not
"see" as well e.g. in heavy snowfall,
against strong light or in thick fog.
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp
may illuminate despite there being no other
vehicle within the blind spot.
07
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
}}
237
07 Driver support
||
BLIS - symbols and messages
NOTE
In situations where the BLIS (p. 235) function
fails or is interrupted, the combined instrument panel may show a symbol, supplemented by an explanatory message. Follow any
recommendation given.
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on
isolated occasions despite there being no
other vehicle within the blind spot then this
does not mean that a fault has arisen in
the system.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system
the display shows the text Blind spot
syst. Service required.
The following illustrations show examples of
situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate even if there is no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
Message examples:
Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g.
noise barrier or concrete road surface.
Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components
must only be performed by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
07
Related information
238
•
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) (p.
235)
•
BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 238)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Message
Specification
Blind-spot
info system
ON
The BLIS system is activated.
BLIS Service
required
Blind spot syst. disengaged - contact a workshop.
BLIS Camera blocked
The BLIS camera is
blocked by dirt, snow or
ice - clean the lenses.
07 Driver support
Message
Specification
BLIS
Reduced
function
Reduced function in the
data transmission
between the BLIS system's camera and the
car's electrical system.
The camera resets itself
when the data transmission between the BLIS
system's camera and the
car's electrical system
returns to normal.
Blind-spot
info system
OFF
The BLIS system is deactivated.
Adjustable steering force*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
The steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity. The setting is
made in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 103).
This setting is not accessible when the car is
moving.
NOTE
In certain situations the power steering
may become too hot and then needs to be
temporarily cooled - during this time the
power steering operates with reduced
power and turning the steering wheel may
then be perceived to be slightly heavier.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
Related information
•
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) (p.
235)
In parallel with the temporarily reduced
steering assistance the combined instrument panel shows a message.
07
Related information
•
MY CAR (p. 103)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
239
STARTING AND DRIVING
08 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
Alcolock* - functions and operation
Alcolock1
The function of the
is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
Functions
WARNING
Indicator
lamp (4)
Battery status
Green flashing
Charging in progress
Green
Fully charged
Yellow
Semi-charged
Red
Discharged - fit the charger
in the holder or connect the
power supply cable from
the glovebox.
The Alcolock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
NOTE
Nozzle for breath test.
Related information
•
Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
241)
•
•
•
Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 243)
•
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 245)
Alcolock* - storage (p. 242)
Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
242)
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
when the car is opened.
Switch.
Transmission button.
Lamp for battery status.
Related information
Lamp for result of breath test.
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Operation - battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery status:
•
•
•
•
Alcolock* (p. 241)
•
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 245)
Alcolock* - storage (p. 242)
Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 243)
Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
242)
08
1
Also called Alcoguard.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
241
08 Starting and driving
Alcolock* - storage
•
Store the Alcolock in its holder. Release the
handheld unit by depressing it slightly in its
holder and releasing it - it then springs out
and can be removed from the holder.
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 245)
Alcolock* - before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
unlocked then it must first be activated
with the switch (2).
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
Handheld unit storage and charging station.
•
Replace the handheld unit in the holder
by pushing it in until it engages.
•
Store the handheld unit in the holder this provides it with the best protection
and keeps its batteries fully charged.
Related information
08
242
•
Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
241)
•
Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
242)
•
•
Alcolock* (p. 241)
Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 243)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. If no message is shown then the transmission to the car may have failed - in
which case, press the button (3) to transmit the result to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
08 Starting and driving
Result after breath test
Indicator
lamp (5) +
Display text
Specification
Green lamp +
Alcoguard
Approved test
Start the engine - no
alcohol content measured.
Yellow lamp +
Alcoguard
Approved test
Engine starting possible - measured alcohol
content is above
0.1 promille but below
the limit value in
forceA.
Red lamp + Disapproved test
Wait 1 minute
Engine starting not
possible - measured
alcohol content is
above the limit value in
forceA.
A
•
•
Alcolock* (p. 241)
Alcolock* - to bear in mind
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 245)
In order to obtain correct function and as
accurate a measurement result as possible:
•
Avoid eating or drinking approx.
5 minutes before the breath test.
•
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in
an incorrect measurement result.
In order to ensure that a new breath test is
carried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
which point the car returns to start inhibition
mode and a new approved breath test is
required before starting the engine.
Limit values vary from country to country. Find out what
applies in your country. See also Alcolock* (p. 241)
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
•
Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
241)
•
Alcolock* - storage (p. 242)
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
243
08 Starting and driving
||
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated
at a workshop2 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the
combined instrument panel shows the message Alcoguard Calibr. required. If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days
then normal engine starting will be blocked only starting with the Bypass function will
then be possible, see the following heading
"Emergency situation".
The message can be cleared by pressing the
send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out
on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then
reappears each time the engine is started only recalibration at a workshop2 can clear
the message permanently.
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes
before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Temperature (ºC)
08
2
244
Maximum heating time (seconds)
+10 to +85
10
-5 to +10
60
-40 to -5
180
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
supply. The combined instrument panel
shows Alcoguard insert power cable. In
which case, connect the power supply cable
from the glovebox and wait until indicator
lamp (6) is green.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the
Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
the bypassing option. This setting can be
changed afterwards at a workshop2.
Activating the Bypass function
•
In extremely cold weather the heating time
can be reduced by taking the Alcolock
indoors.
Emergency situation
In the event of an emergency situation or the
Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to
bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved
in memory, see Recording data (p. 15).
After the Bypass function has been activated
the combined instrument panel shows
Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time
while driving and can only be reset by a workshop2.
The Bypass function can be tested without
the error message being logged - in which
case, carry out all the steps without starting
the car. The error message is cleared when
the car is locked.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instrument panel first shows Bypass activated
Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard
Bypass enabled - after which the engine
can be started.
This function can be activated several times.
The error message shown during driving can
only be cleared at a workshop2.
Activating the Emergency function
•
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard Bypass
enabled and the engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop2.
Related information
•
Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
241)
•
Alcolock* - storage (p. 242)
08 Starting and driving
•
Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
242)
•
•
Alcolock* - symbols and text
messages
Alcolock* (p. 241)
In addition to the previously described messages related to how the alcolock works
before starting the engine (p. 242) the combined instrument panel's display can also
show the following:
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 245)
Display text
Meaning/Action
Alcoguard
Restart possible
The engine has been
switched off for less than
30 minutes - engine starting possible without
new test.
Display text
Meaning/Action
Alcoguard
Blow harder
Blowing too weak - blow
harder.
Alcoguard
wait Preheating
Heating not finished wait for text Alcoguard
Blow 5 seconds.
A
Alcoguard
Service
required
Contact a workshopA.
Alcoguard No
signal
Transmission failed send manually with button (3) or take a new
breath test.
Alcoguard
Invalid test
Test failed - take a new
breath test.
Alcoguard
Blow longer
Blowing too short - blow
for longer.
Alcoguard
Blow softer
Blowing too hard - blow
more gently.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
241)
•
•
•
Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 243)
Alcolock* - storage (p. 242)
Alcolock* (p. 241)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08
245
08 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
The engine is started and switched off using
the remote control key and the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
Petrol and diesel engine
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and press it in to its end position. Note that if the car is equipped with
Alcolock* then a breath test must first be
approved before the engine can be
started. For more information on the
Alcolock, see Alcolock* (p. 241).
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed3.
(For cars with automatic gearbox depress the brake pedal.)
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
NOTE
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key
incorrectly turned - hold the end with the
detachable key blade, see Detachable key
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 156).
For diesel-engined cars, there may be a
slight delay before the engine can be
started - Engine Preheating is displayed
in the meantime.
When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until the
overheating protection triggers.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
08
3
246
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch after starting the engine
or when the car is being towed.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when leaving the
car, and make sure that the key position is
0 - in particular if there are children in the
car. For information on how this works see Key positions (p. 66).
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible,
which minimises exhaust emissions and
protects the environment.
Keyless drive*
Follow steps 2-3 for keyless (p. 159) starting
of the engine.
08 Starting and driving
NOTE
A prerequisite for the engine to start is that
one of the car's remote control keys with
the Keyless drive function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
Switching off the engine
Steering lock
The engine is switched off using the START/
STOP ENGINE button.
The steering lock makes steering difficult if
the car is e.g. taken unlawfully.
To stop the engine:
Function
•
If the gear selector is not in P position or if
the car is moving:
•
Related information
•
Switching off the engine (p. 247)
Press START/STOP ENGINE - the
engine stops.
Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or
hold the button depressed until the
engine stops.
Related information
•
Key positions (p. 66)
•
The steering lock unlocks when the
remote control key is in the ignition
switch4 and the START/STOP ENGINE
button is depressed.
•
The steering lock locks when the driver's
door is opened after the engine has been
switched off.
A mechanical noise can be perceived when
the steering lock unlocks or locks.
Related information
•
•
•
Starting the engine (p. 246)
Key positions (p. 66)
Steering wheel (p. 74)
08
4
Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
247
08 Starting and driving
Remote start (ERS)*
WARNING
Remote start (ERS – Engine Remote Start)
means that the car's engine can be started
remotely using the remote control key or the
PCC key. This is so that the passenger compartment can be warmed up/cooled down
before departure.
To remote-start the engine, the following
criteria must be met:
•
•
•
The climate control system and audio system
start with the same settings that were in use
when the car was parked.
An ERS-started engine is activated for a
maximum of 15 minutes, then it is switched
off. After two ERS-activations the engine
must be started in the normal way before
ERS can be re-used.
•
•
NOTE
The service life of the remote control key's
battery is affected by the ERS function. In
the event of frequent use of ERS the battery should therefore be changed once per
year, see Remote control key/PCC replacing the battery (p. 158).
NOTE
Follow local/national rules/regulations on
idling.
5
248
The car must be supervised.
There must be no people or animals
inside the car.
The car must not be parked in a
closed, unventilated area - the exhaust
gases may seriously injure humans
and animals.
Related information
The optional ERS function is available on
most cars with automatic gearbox.
08
Remote start (ERS) - operation
Only on PCC key, see PCC* - unique functions (p. 154).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 248)
Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages (p. 250)
The key's buttons for remote start.
Unlocking
Locking
Approach light duration
Unlocking, tailgate
Information5
Remote starting the engine
To be able to remotely start the engine, the
car must be locked.
Proceed as follows:
08 Starting and driving
1. Briefly press on the key's button (2).
Active functions
2. Follow this immediately afterwards with a
long press - at least 2 seconds - on
button (3).
The following functions are activated with a
remote started engine:
If the conditions for ERS are fulfilled then the
following takes place:
1. The direction indicators flash quickly several times.
2. The engine starts.
3. The direction indicators illuminate with a
constant glow for 3 seconds to verify that
the engine has started.
NOTE
After remote starting, the car continues to
be locked but with deactivated movement
detector*.
With PCC6 key
•
•
•
Ventilation system
Audio/video system
Related information
The following functions are deactivated with a
remote started engine:
Remote start (ERS)* (p. 248)
Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages (p. 250)
Headlamps
Position lamps
Number plate lighting
Windscreen wiper.
ERS is interrupted
The following steps switch off an ERS-started
engine:
•
The remote control key's
button (1), (2) or (4) is depressed
The light indication for Approach
lighting7 flashes several times when
the button is pressed and then goes
to constant glow if all criteria for
ERS have been fulfilled. However, this does
not mean that ERS has started the engine.
•
•
•
To check whether ERS has started the
engine, the user can press the button (5) - if
the engine has started, there is a light indication by the buttons (2) and (3).
•
The gear selector is moved out of P position
•
There is approx.10 litres left in the fuel
tank
6
7
Active ERS time exceeds 15 minutes.
When an ERS-started engine is switched off,
the direction indicators illuminate with a constant glow for 3 seconds.
•
•
Approach light duration.
Deactivated functions
•
•
•
•
•
The car is unlocked
A door is opened
Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is
depressed
08
For more information on the PCC key, see PCC* - unique functions (p. 154).
For more information on Approach lighting, see Remote control key - functions (p. 152) and Approach light duration (p. 86).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
249
08 Starting and driving
Remote start (ERS) - symbols and
messages
In situations where the ERS function fails or is
interrupted, a symbol is shown in the combined instrument panel, supplemented by an
explanatory text message.
250
Specification
Message
Specification
No remote
start engine
warning
ERS unavailable due to
warning message from
engine. Contact a workshopA.
Remote start
off driver in
car
ERS interrupted
because someone is in
the passenger compartment.
ERS unavailable due to
error message from cooling system, see Coolant level (p. 328).
Remote start
off engine
warning
ERS interrupted due to
error message from
engine. Contact a workshopA.
Message
Specification
No remote
start engine
coolant
No remote
start Max 2
starts
ERS unavailable because
a maximum of 2 ERS
activations in succession
are allowed.
No remote
start door
open
ERS unavailable because
a door/boot lid was not
closed.
Remote start
off low battery
ERS interrupted
because battery voltage
too low.
No remote
start low fuel
level
ERS unavailable because
fuel level too low.
No remote
start car not
locked
ERS unavailable because
the car was not locked.
Remote start
off engine
coolant
ERS interrupted due to
error message from
cooling system.
No remote
start gear not
in P
ERS unavailable because
gear selector is not in P
position.
ERS function unavailable
08
Message
No remote
start driver in
car
ERS unavailable because
someone is in the passenger compartment.
No remote
start low battery
ERS unavailable due to
low battery voltage.
Charge the battery by
starting the engine.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Interrupted ERS function
Message
Specification
Remote start
off low fuel
level
ERS interrupted
because fuel level too
low.
Remote start
off gear not in
P
ERS interrupted
because gear selector is
not in P position.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
Remote start (ERS)* (p. 248)
Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 248)
08 Starting and driving
Starting the engine – Flexifuel
Flexifuel engines can be driven on 95 octane
unleaded petrol and bioethanol E85. The
engine is started in the same way as in a petrol-driven car.
•
Engine block heater*
block heater should be activated for at
least 2 hours.
•
Make further attempts to start with the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
In outside temperatures lower than
-20 °C, the electric engine block heater
should be activated for at least 3 hours.
•
Check that the engine block heater has
been activated and, where appropriate,
activate it for the time specified above.
WARNING
IMPORTANT
The engine block heater is powered by
high voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an
electric engine block heater and its electrical connections must only be carried out
by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Points to remember for carrying reserve
fuel:
Electrical input to the engine block heater.
Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine
block heater. Starting and driving with a preheated engine means significantly reduced
emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For
this reason you should aim to use the engine
block heater throughout the winter months.
•
•
In outside temperatures between
+5 °C and -10 °C, the electric engine
block heater should be activated for at
least 1 hour.
In outside temperatures between
-10 °C and -20 °C, the electric engine
•
In the event of stalling due to an empty
fuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a
reserve fuel can may make the engine
difficult to start in extreme cold. This is
avoided by filling the reserve fuel can
with 95 octane petrol.
For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol
E85 fuel, see Fuel - bioethanol E85 (p. 286).
If the engine does not start despite repeated start attempts, you are recommended
to contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Fuel adaptation
Flexifuel engines can be driven on both 95
octane unleaded petrol and bioethanol E85.
Both fuels are filled in the common fuel tank
so that any variations of mixing ratios
between these two fuels is possible.
If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car
has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice
versa) then the engine may run slightly
unevenly for a time. For this reason it is
important to allow the engine to accustom
itself (adapt) to the new fuel mixture.
Adaptation takes place automatically when
the car is driven for a short period at an even
speed.
In the event of starting difficulties
If the engine does not start at the first start
attempt:
08
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
251
08 Starting and driving
||
IMPORTANT
After the fuel mixture in the tank has been
changed an adaptation should be made by
driving at an even speed for about 15
minutes.
Jump starting with battery
If the starter battery (p. 341) is discharged
then the car can be started with current from
another battery.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the
battery in your car and remove the cover,
see Starter battery - replacement (p.
342).
Related information
Jump starting with battery (p. 252)
Starting the engine (p. 246)
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
When jump starting the car, the following
steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage:
1. Insert the remote control key in key position 0 (p. 66).
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine
and make sure that the two cars do not
touch each other.
08
252
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected then a slightly longer period of driving
is required for the adaptation as the memory
for the electronics has been cleared.
•
•
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's positive
terminal (1).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative
terminal (3).
8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at
the top, the outer screw head (4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no
sparks during the starting procedure.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle
approx. 1500 rpm.
08 Starting and driving
11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the
start procedure. There is a risk of sparks
forming.
Gearboxes
Manual gearbox
There are two main types of gearbox. Manual
gearbox and automatic gearbox.
The function of the gearbox is to change the
gear ratio depending on speed and power
requirements.
•
•
To prevent damage to any drive system
components, the working temperature of
the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of
overheating, a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel in
conjunction with a text message being
shown. Follow the recommendation given
in the text message.
WARNING
•
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p.
255)
Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.
The 6-speed box is available in two versions reverse gear position differs between them.
Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted
on the gear lever.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
•
Depress the clutch pedal fully during
each gear change.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
•
Take your foot off the clutch pedal
between gear changes.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 255)
and Powershift (p. 258)
IMPORTANT
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the
clamp connected to the red jump lead!
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
Manual gearbox (p. 253)
Starting the engine (p. 246)
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when
parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear
is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08
253
08 Starting and driving
||
Reverse gear inhibitor
Gear shift indicator*
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage
reverse gear during normal forward travel.
The gear shift indicator notifies the driver
when it is appropriate to engage the next
higher or lower gear. An essential detail in
connection with environmental driving is to
drive in the right gear and to change gear in
plenty of time.
•
Follow the gearing pattern printed on the
gear lever and start from neutral position,
N before moving it to R position.
•
Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
Manual gearbox
Gear shift indicator for manual gearbox. Only one
marker is illuminated at a
time - during normal driving
it is only illuminated in the
centre.
NOTE
With the upper variant of the shifting pattern for 6-speed gearbox (see previous
illustration) - first press down the gear
lever in the N position in order to engage
reverse gear.
Related information
•
•
Gearboxes (p. 253)
When gearing up/down as recommended, the
upper one is illuminated at +" or the lower at
"-", marked red in the illustration.
Automatic gearbox
Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p.
379)
08
Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear
shift indicator.
254
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
An indicator is available as an aid on some
variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which
notifies the driver when it is appropriate to
engage the next higher or lower gear in order
to obtain the lowest possible fuel consumption. However, taking into consideration characteristics such as performance and vibration-free running, it may be advantageous to
change gear at a higher engine speed. The
framed number indicates the current gear.
With "Analogue" combined
instrument panel, the gear
positions and indicator
arrows are shown in the
instrument's centre.
08 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*
Parking position - P
Neutral position - N
The Geartronic gearbox has two different gear
modes - Automatic and Manual.
Select position P when starting the engine or
when the car is parked.
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in N position.
•
In order to be able to move the gear
selector from P-position, the brake pedal
must first be depressed firmly.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
the P position is engaged. Also apply the
parking brake (p. 275), as a precaution.
NOTE
Geartronic – Manual gear positions
(+S-)
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear
positions. S8: Sport mode*.
Combined instrument panel (p. 55) shows the
position of the gear selector using the following indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.
Gear positions
Automatic gear positions are
indicated on the right of the
combined instrument panel.
(Only one marker is illuminated at a time - the one
showing the current gear
selector position.)
The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position P is selected.
The manual gear position is reached
by moving the lever to the side from
position D to the end position at
"+S-". The combined instrument
panel's symbol "+S-" changes colour from
WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc.
are displayed in a box, corresponding to the
gear that has just been selected.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when
parking on a slope - the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to
hold the car in all situation.
•
Reverse position - R
The car must be stationary when R position is
selected.
Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when
the mode is active.
8
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up
and down takes place automatically based on
the level of acceleration and speed. The car
must be stationary when the gear selector is
moved to D position from R position.
Move the lever forwards towards "+"
(plus) to change up a gear and release the
lever, which returns to its rest position
between + and –.
or
The "Sport mode" function is not available in a V60 Plug-in Hybrid - only "+" and "-".
08
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
255
08 Starting and driving
||
•
Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode "+S–" can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower
than a level suitable for the selected gear, in
order to avoid jerking and stalling.
instrument panel then changes indication
from "D" to a figure, which indicates the current gear.
To then change gear one step:
•
Pull one of the paddles backwards towards the steering wheel - and release.
Move the lever to the side to the end
position at D.
Manual deactivation
The steering wheel paddle shifters can
also be deactivated manually:
NOTE
If the gearbox has a Sport programme
then the gearbox will only become manual
after the gear selector has been moved
forwards or backwards in its "+S–" position. The combined instrument panel then
changes indication from S to show which
of the gears 1, 2, 3 etc. is engaged.
Paddles*
As a supplement to manual gear changing
with the gear selector there are also controls
located on the steering wheel, so-called
"paddles".
08
256
To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles they must first be activated.
This is by means of pulling one of the paddles
toward the steering wheel - the combined
If the steering wheel paddles are not used
then they are deactivated after a short time
- this is indicated when the combined
instrument panel switches indication, from
the figure for the current gear back to "D".
The exception is during engine braking then the paddles are activated as long as
engine braking is in progress.
To return to automatic driving mode:
•
NOTE
Automatic deactivation
•
Both steering wheel "paddles".
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle provided that the engine speed does not
leave the permitted range.
After each gear change the combined instrument panel changes figure to show the current gear.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Pull both paddles toward the steering
wheel and hold until the combined
instrument panel changes character
from the figure for the current gear to
"D".
The paddles can also be used with the gear
selector in Sport mode* - then the paddles
are constantly activated without being deactivated.
08 Starting and driving
Geartronic - Sport mode* (S)9
The Sport programme provides
sportier characteristics and allows
higher engine speed for the gears.
At the same time it responds more
quickly to acceleration. During active driving,
the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading
to a delayed upshift.
To activate Sport mode:
•
Move the gear selector to the side from D
position to the end position at "+S–" - the
combined instrument panel changes indication from D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear selector from D position to the end
position at "+S–" - the combined instrument panel changes indication from D to
the figure 110.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever
forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
9
10
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the
car moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
when the engine reaches its maximum speed
in order to prevent damage to the engine.
Kick-down
•
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
Related information
Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p.
379)
If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down
function.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/
kick-down which would result in an engine
speed high enough to damage the engine.
Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift
down in this way at high engine speed – the
original gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up
08
With some engines only.
If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
257
08 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox -- Powershift*
An automatic gearbox with Powershift differs
from an automatic gearbox with Geartronic (p.
255), in that it has double mechanical clutch
discs.
D: Automatic gear positions. +S–: Manual gear
positions. S: Sport mode*.
The Powershift automatic gearbox transmits
the motive force from the engine to the drive
wheels with double mechanical clutch discs,
as opposed to Geartronic which instead uses
a hydraulic torque converter.
08
258
Powershift transmission operates in the same
way and has similar controls and functions as
the Geartronic automatic transmission. One
exception is Geartronic's Winter mode, see
the section "Geartronic - Winter mode" (p.
255). Powershift enables driving away on a
slippery road surface if 2nd gear is engaged
manually instead of 3rd gear (Geartronic).
Powershift or Geartronic
The model with Powershift transmission
should not be towed as it is dependent on the
engine running in order to receive sufficient
lubrication. If towing still has to take place,
the route must be as short as possible and
then with very low speed.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or
not the car is equipped with Powershift transmission, this can be verified by checking the
designation on the gearbox label under the
bonnet - see Type designations (p. 366). The
designation ”MPS6” means that it is
Powershift transmission - otherwise it is
Geartronic automatic transmission.
To bear in mind
can also overheat during slow driving in
queues (10 km/h or slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer hitched. The transmission
cools down when the car is stationary, with
foot brake depressed and the engine running
at idling speed.
Overheating during slow driving in queues
can be avoided by driving in stages:
•
Stop the car and wait with your foot on
the brake pedal until there is a moderate
distance to the traffic ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then wait
another moment with your foot on the
brake pedal.
IMPORTANT
Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the
car with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox could then overheat.
The transmission's double clutch has overload protection that is activated if it becomes
too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with
the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for
a long time.
For important information regarding Powershift transmission and towing, see Towing (p.
295).
Overheated transmission causes the car to
shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol
illuminates and the combined instrument
panel shows a message. The transmission
In some situations the combined instrument
panel may show a text message at the same
time as a symbol is illuminated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Text message and action
08 Starting and driving
Symbol
A
Message
Driving characteristics
Action
Transm. overheat
brake to hold
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at
constant engine speed.
Transmission overheated. Keep the car stationary using the
foot brake.A
Transm. overheat park
safely
Significant pulling in the car's traction.
Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe
manner.A
Transm. cooling let
engine run
No drive due to overheated gearbox.
Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine
at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until
the message clears.
For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an
increased degree of seriousness should the
transmission become too hot. In parallel with
the text message, the driver is also advised
that the car's electronics are temporarily
changing the driving characteristics. Follow
the instructions in the text message where
appropriate.
NOTE
The examples in the table are no indication
of the car being defective, but show that a
safety function has been activated with a
view to preventing damage to any of the
car's components.
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text
Transm. overheat park safely is ignored
then the heat in the gearbox may become
so high that the power transmission
between engine and gearbox is temporarily halted in order to prevent the clutch
from malfunctioning - the car then loses
drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acceptable
level.
For more possible text messages with their
respective proposals for solutions concerning
automatic gearbox, see Messages (p. 101).
A text message extinguishes automatically
after the action has been carried out or after
one press on the indicator stalk OK button.
08
259
08 Starting and driving
•
Gear selector inhibitor
There are two different types of gear selector
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another position.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock
Parking position (P)
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
To be able to move the gear selector from P
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the remote control key
must be in key position II (p. 67).
G021351
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with
the inhibitor button on the gear selector.
If the gear selector is in N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the remote control key
must be in key position II.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards
between P, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety
systems:
Move the gear selector from the P position and pull up the key blade.
Stationary car with engine running:
11
260
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
behind the centre console and locate a
hole11 for the key blade (p. 156) in the
bottom of the compartment.
Search for a spring-loaded button down
in the hole with the key blade; depress
the button with the blade and hold.
Parking position (P)
08
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
battery, the gear selector must be moved
from the P position so that the car can be
moved.
There may be 2 holes - one for the key blade and one that fixes the rubber mat.
4. Set the rubber mat back in place.
08 Starting and driving
Related information
•
•
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 255)
Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 258)
Hill start assist (HSA)*12
Start/Stop*
The foot brake can be released before setting
off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start
Assist) function means that the car does not
roll backwards.
Some engine and gearbox combinations
come fitted with a Start and Stop function
which engages in the event of e.g. stationary
traffic or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is
then switched off temporarily and restarts
automatically when the journey is due to continue.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake
pedal to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver accelerates.
Related information
•
Starting the engine (p. 246)
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which guides all our
activities. This target orientation has resulted
in several separate energy-saving functions of
which Start/Stop is one, all with the collective
task of reducing fuel consumption, which in
turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions.
General information about Start/Stop
The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter
and cleaner.
12
08
Depends on engine and gearbox combination. HSA not possible with some combinations.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
261
08 Starting and driving
||
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
opportunity for a more active environmentally
conscious way of driving the car by means of
being able to allow the engine to stop automatically, whenever appropriate.
Manual or Automatic
Note that there are differences in the
Start/Stop function depending on whether the
gearbox is manual or automatic.
Start/Stop* - function and operation
The Start/Stop function is
activated automatically when
the engine is started with the
key. The driver is made
aware of this by the function's symbol illuminating in
the combined instrument
panel and the On/Off button
lamp illuminating.
Related information
•
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
262)
•
•
•
Starting the engine (p. 246)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
265)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
264)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 266)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
268)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 344)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 267)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not autostart (p. 266)
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work as normal even with an engine that has stopped
automatically, except that some equipment
may have the function temporarily reduced,
e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or
extremely high volume on the audio system.
Engine auto-stop
The following is required for the engine to
auto-stop:
08
262
Conditions
Some engine and gearbox combinations are
equipped with a Start/Stop function which
engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic
or waiting at traffic lights. The Start/Stop
function is activated automatically when the
engine is started with the key.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A
M/A
A
Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral position and release the clutch
pedal - the engine stops automatically.
M
Stop the car with the foot brake,
and then keep your foot on the
pedal - the engine auto-stops.
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If the ECO function is activated then the engine may
auto-stop before the car is
completely stationary.
As verification and reminder that the
engine is auto-stopped the combined instrument panel's symbol for
the Start/Stop function illuminates.
08 Starting and driving
Engine auto-start
Deactivate the Start/Stop function
Conditions
M/
AA
With the gear lever in neutral position:
M
In certain situations, it may
advisable to temporarily
switch off the automatic
Start/Stop function - this is
carried out with a push of
this button.
1. Depress the clutch pedal or
press the accelerator pedal the engine starts.
2. Engage a suitable gear and
drive.
A
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
265)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
264)
Disengaged function is indicated by
the combined instrument panel's
Start/Stop symbol and the On/Off
button's lamp extinguishing.
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 266)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
268)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 344)
A
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it
is reactivated with the button or until the next
time the engine is started with the key.
Maintain foot pressure on the foot
brake and depress the accelerator
pedal - the engine auto-starts.
A
Start assistance HSA
The following option is also available on a downhill gradient:
M+
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 267)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not autostart (p. 266)
•
Release the foot pressure on the
foot brake - the engine auto-starts
and the journey can continue.
Release the foot brake and let the
car move off - the engine starts
automatically when the speed
exceeds normal walking pace.
•
•
The foot brake can also be released on an
uphill slope to auto-start the engine - the HSA
(p. 261) (Hill Start Assist) function prevents
the car from rolling backwards.
HSA means that the pressure in the brake
system remains temporarily available while
the driver moves his/her foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal for driving off
with the engine having stopped automatically.
The temporary braking effect releases after a
few seconds or when the driver depresses
the accelerator pedal.
Related information
•
•
08
Start/Stop* (p. 261)
Starting the engine (p. 246)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
263
08 Starting and driving
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
Some engine and gearbox combinations are
equipped with a Start/Stop function which
engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic
or waiting at traffic lights. Although the
Start/Stop function is activated, the engine
does not always stop automatically.
The engine does not auto-stop if:
08
264
Conditions
M/AA
the car has not first reached
approx. 8 km/h after a key start or
the last auto-stop.
M+A
the driver has unbuckled the seatbelt.
M+A
battery capacity is below the minimum permitted level.
M+A
the engine does not have normal
operating temperature.
M+A
outside temperature is below
freezing point or above
approx. 30 °C.
M+A
the windscreen's electric heating
is activated.
M+A
Conditions
M/AA
Conditions
the environment in the passenger
compartment deviates from the
preset values - indicated by the
ventilation fan running at a high
speed.
M+A
the atmospheric air pressure is
less than equivalent to 1500-2500
metres above sea level - the current air pressure varies with the
prevailing weather conditions.
A
the car is reversed.
M+A
A
the starter battery temperature is
below the freezing point or is too
high.
M+A
adaptive cruise control Queue
Assist is activated.
the gear selector is in S positionC
or "+/-".
A
the driver makes greater steering
wheel movements.
M+A
the exhaust system's particulate
filter is full - the temporarily disengaged Start/Stop function is reactivated as soon as an automatic
cleaning cycle has been performed (see Diesel particle filter
(DPF) (p. 287)).
M+A
the road is very steep.
M+A
a trailer is connected electrically
to the car’s electrical system.
M+A
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
265)
the bonnet has been openedB.
M+A
•
A
Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 266)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
268)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 344)
the gearbox does not have normal
operating temperature.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A
B
C
M/AA
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
With certain engines only.
Sport mode.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Start/Stop* (p. 261)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
262)
Starting the engine (p. 246)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 267)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not autostart (p. 266)
08 Starting and driving
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
Some engine and gearbox combinations are
equipped with a Start/Stop function which
engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic
or waiting at traffic lights. An auto-stopped
engine may restart in certain cases without
the driver having decided that the journey
should continue.
In the following cases the engine also starts
automatically if the driver has not depressed
the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes
his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic
gearbox):
Conditions
M/AA
Misting forms on the windows.
M+A
The environment in the passenger
compartment deviates from the
preset values.
M+A
There is a temporarily high current
take-off or battery capacity drops
below the minimum permitted
level.
M+A
M/AA
The car starts to move, or increases speed slightly if the car autostopped without being fully stationary.
M+A
•
•
The driver's seatbelt buckle is
opened with the gear selector in D
or N position.
A
•
•
•
Steering wheel
A
B
C
Related information
Conditions
movementsB.
A
The gear selector is moved out of
the D position to S positionC, R or
"+/-".
A
The driver's door is opened with
the gear selector in D position - a
"ping" sound and text message
inform that the Start/Stop function
is active.
A
Start/Stop* (p. 261)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
262)
Starting the engine (p. 246)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 267)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not autostart (p. 266)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
264)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 266)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
268)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 344)
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
With certain engines only.
Sport mode.
WARNING
Repeated pumping of the brake
pedal.
M+A
The bonnet is openedB.
M+A
Do not open the bonnet when the engine
has stopped automatically - the engine
may suddenly start automatically. First
switch off the engine as normal using the
START/STOP ENGINE button before
opening the bonnet.
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
265
08 Starting and driving
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
265)
Some engine and gearbox combinations are
equipped with a Start/Stop function which
engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic
or waiting at traffic lights. The engine does
not always auto-start after having auto-stopped.
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary engine
stoppage manual gearbox
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
264)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 266)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
268)
Some engine and gearbox combinations are
equipped with a Start/Stop function which
engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic
or waiting at traffic lights. In the event that a
start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed in
accordance with the below:
In the following cases the engine does not
auto-start after having auto-stopped:
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 344)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not
auto-start
Conditions
M/
AA
A gear is engaged without
declutching - a display text
prompts the driver to set the gear
lever in neutral position in order to
enable auto-start.
M
The driver is unrestrained, the gear
selector is in P position and the
driver’s door is open - a normal
engine start must take place.
A
A
08
266
•
•
2. In certain cases the gear lever must be
set in neutral position. The combined
instrument panel then shows the text Put
gear in neutral.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Start/Stop* (p. 261)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
262)
Starting the engine (p. 246)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 267)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not autostart (p. 266)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
265)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
264)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
262)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
268)
Starting the engine (p. 246)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 344)
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Related information
•
•
1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the
engine starts automatically.
Start/Stop* (p. 261)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 267)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Starting and driving
Start/Stop* - settings
Some engine and gearbox combinations are
equipped with a Start/Stop function which
engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic
or waiting at traffic lights. The car's MY CAR
menu system, under the DRIVe heading, contains information about Volvo's Start-Stop
system, as well as recommendations for
energy-saving driving techniques.
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
264)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 266)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
268)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 344)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Start/Stop* (p. 261)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
262)
Starting the engine (p. 246)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not autostart (p. 266)
08
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
265)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
267
08 Starting and driving
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
Text message
The Start/Stop function can show text messages on the information display.
In combination with this indicator
lamp the Start/Stop function may
show text messages in the combined instrument panel for certain situations.
Symbol
Message
Info/action
M/AA
Auto Start-Stop serv.
required
Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
M+A
Autostart Engine running +
acoustic signal
Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine and the gear selector is
in D position.
A
Press Start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
M+A
Depress clutch pedal to
start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
Press brake and clutch to
start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
Put gear in neutral to start
Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position.
M
08
268
For some of them there is a recommended
action that should be performed. The following table shows some examples.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Starting and driving
Symbol
A
Message
Info/action
Select P or N to start
Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the
engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
A
Press Start button
The engine will not auto-start - start the engine normally with the START/STOP ENGINE
button and the gear selector in P or N.
A
M/AA
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If a message does not go out following completion of the action then a workshop should
be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Start/Stop* (p. 261)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
262)
Starting the engine (p. 246)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 267)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not autostart (p. 266)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
265)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
264)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 266)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 344)
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
269
08 Starting and driving
ECO*
ECO is an innovative Volvo function for automatic-gearbox cars, capable of reducing fuel
consumption by up to 5%, depending on the
driver's driving style. The function gives the
driver the option of a more active environmentally conscious way of driving.
General
The following are changed
upon activation of the ECO
function:
•
•
08
270
NOTE
ECO - Operation
•
The Eco Coast function is activated engine braking ceases.
•
Climate control system settings - some
electricity consumers are deactivated or
operate at reduced power.
Eco Coast - Function
The Eco Coast subfunction means in practice
that engine braking is deactivated, meaning in
turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to
coast for longer distances. When the driver
releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is
automatically disengaged from the engine
whose speed is reduced to idling speed with
minimum consumption.
Gearbox gearshift points.
Start/Stop function - the engine can also
auto-stop before the car has stopped to
being fully stationary.
Disengaged ECO function is
indicated by the combined
instrument panel ECO symbol and the ECO button lamp
extinguishing. The function is
then switched off until it is
reactivated with the ECO
button.
When the ECO function is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several
electricity consumer functions are reduced
- a press of the AC button resets the climate control system, but then with
reduced AC function.
Engine management and response from
the accelerator pedal.
•
ECO function On or Off
This function is intended for use in the event
of an anticipated reduction in speed, e.g. to
roll forward to an intersection or a red light.
ECO On/Off
ECO symbol
The ECO function is deactivated when the
engine is switched off, and must therefore be
activated after each time the engine is
started. There are exceptions for certain
engines. However, it is easily verified by
means of both the combined instrument
panel ECO symbol and the ECO button lamp
illuminating when the function is activated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Eco Coast enables proactive driving where
the driver can use the so-called "Pulse &
Glide" technique and a minimum of braking.
Combination On and Off
A combination of Eco Coast and temporarily
deactivated ECO function can also collectively contribute to reduced consumption.
Accordingly:
•
Active Eco Coast: Long coasting without
engine braking = Low consumption
08 Starting and driving
and
•
Deactivated ECO function: Short coasting
with engine braking = Minimum consumption.
NOTE
However, to achieve optimal low fuel consumption, Eco Coast in combination with
short coasting distances should generally
be avoided.
Activate Eco Coast
The function is activated when the accelerator pedal is fully released, in combination with
the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
The ECO button activated
The gear selector in D position
Speed within the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h
The road's downhill gradient is not
steeper than approx. 6%.
Deactivate Eco Coast
Deactivating Eco Coast and returning to
engine braking can be performed as follows:
•
•
Press the ECO button.
•
Change gear with the steering wheel paddle shifters.
•
Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.
More information and settings
Move the gear lever to manual "S+/-"
position.
Eco Coast - Limitations
The function is not available if:
•
•
cruise control is activated
•
manual gear changing is performed with
the steering wheel paddle shifters*
•
engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
operating temperature.
•
the gear selector is moved from D- to "S
+/-" position
•
speed is outside the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h
the road's downhill gradient is steeper
than approx. 6%.
The car's menu system MY CAR contains
further information on the ECO concept - see
the section MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
In certain situations it may be desirable to
deactivate the Eco Coast function. Examples
of such situations include:
•
on steep downhill gradients - to be able
to use engine braking.
•
before an imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be able to complete it in
the safest way possible.
08
271
08 Starting and driving
All Wheel Drive - AWD*
Foot brake
The best traction possible is achieved with allwheel drive.
The foot brake is used to reduce the car's
speed while driving.
All Wheel Drive is always available
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
one brake circuit is damaged then this will
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper
level and higher pedal pressure is needed to
produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the
engine is running.
All Wheel Drive (All Wheel Drive) means that
the car is driving all four wheels at the same
time.
The power is automatically distributed
between the front and rear wheels. An electronically controlled clutch system distributes
the power to the wheels that have the best
grip on the current road surface. This provides the best traction and prevents wheel
spin. Under normal driving conditions, the
majority of power is transmitted to the front
wheels.
08
272
All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in
rain, snow and icy conditions.
If the brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake
the car.
and after the car has been washed, it is
advisable to carry out cleaning by braking
gently for a short period while driving.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols and messages
Symbol
Specification
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a
heavy load the brakes can be relieved by
using engine braking. Engine braking is most
efficiently used if the same gear is used
downhill as up.
Constant glow – Check the
brake fluid level. If the level is
low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the
brake fluid loss.
For more general information on heavy loads
on the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving
conditions (p. 375).
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started automatic function check.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. With
wet road surfaces, prior to long-stay parking
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Starting and driving
WARNING
If
and
illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
Related information
•
•
Parking brake (p. 275)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p.
273)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 274)
•
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p.
273)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System), prevents the wheels from
locking up during braking.
The function allows steering ability to be
maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid
a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in
the brake pedal when this is engaged and this
is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the engine has been started
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A
further automatic test of the ABS system may
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The
test may be experienced as pulses in the
brake pedal.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Foot brake (p. 272)
Parking brake (p. 275)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning
flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The
function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining with
a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at
speeds above 50 km/h in the event of sudden
braking. After the car's speed has been
slowed below 10 km/h the brake light returns
from flashing to the normal constant glow while at the same time the hazard warning
flashers (p. 83) are activated, and they flash
until the driver changes engine speed with the
accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with
their button.
Related information
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p.
273)
•
•
•
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 274)
•
Foot brake (p. 272)
Parking brake (p. 275)
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 274)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p.
273)
08
273
08 Starting and driving
Foot brake - emergency brake
assistance
Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking
force and so reduce the braking distance.
EBA detects the driver's braking style and
increases the braking force when necessary.
The brake force can be reinforced up to the
level when the ABS system is engaged. The
EBA function is interrupted when the pressure
on the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal
lowers slightly more than usual, depress
(hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all
braking ceases.
Related information
•
•
•
•
08
274
Foot brake (p. 272)
Parking brake (p. 275)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p.
273)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p.
273)
08 Starting and driving
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
The parking brake holds the car stationary,
when the driver's seat is empty, by mechanically locking/blocking two wheels.
pressing and holding the control for PUSH
LOCK/PULL RELEASE. The braking procedure is stopped when the control is released.
NOTE
Function
In the event of emergency braking at
speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds
during the braking procedure.
A faint electric motor noise can be heard
when the electrical parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during
the automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.
If it is applied when the car is moving then the
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes
over to the rear wheels when the car is almost
stationary.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied.
Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage
is too low, see Jump starting with battery (p.
252).
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
Parking brake control - apply.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
•
2. Press the control PUSH LOCK/PULL
RELEASE.
>
The combined instrument panel's symbol starts flashing - once there
is a constant glow the parking brake is
applied.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
•
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when
parking on a slope - leaving the car in
gear, or in P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all
situation.
When parking the vehicle, always engage
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
Emergency brake
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is in motion by
08
}}
275
08 Starting and driving
||
Disengaging the parking brake
NOTE
The parking brake can also be released
manually by depressing the clutch pedal
instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recommends that the brake pedal is used.
Releasing automatically
1. Start the engine.
2. Engage 1st gear or reverse gear.
Cars with manual gearbox
3. Ease up the clutch and depress the
accelerator.
>
The parking brake releases and
the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.
Releasing manually
Cars with automatic gearbox
Parking brake control - release.
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.13
2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
3. Pull the control PUSH LOCK/PULL
RELEASE.
>
The parking brake releases and
the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.
276
4. Move the gear selector to position D or R
and depress the accelerator.
>
The parking brake releases and
the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.
NOTE
For safety reasons, the parking brake is
only released automatically if the engine is
running and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The parking brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox
when the accelerator pedal is depressed
and the gear selector is in position D or R.
Heavy load uphill
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch13.
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
car to roll backward when the parking brake
is released automatically on a steep incline.
Avoid this by depressing the control while
driving off. Release the control when the
engine achieves traction.
2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
3. Pull the control.
>
The parking brake releases and
the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.
1. Put the seatbelt on.
13
3. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
Releasing manually
Releasing automatically
08
2. Start the engine.
For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electric
parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
08 Starting and driving
Symbols and messages
For information on how the combined instrument panel's text messages can be shown
Symbol
and deleted, see Messages - handling (p.
102).
Message
Meaning/Action
"Message"
•
Read the message in the combined instrument panel.
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.
If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen.
•
Park brake not
fully released
Read the message in the combined instrument panel.
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released:
•
Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.
08
}}
277
08 Starting and driving
||
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
Parking brake
not applied
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied:
•
Try to release and apply the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door
open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.
Parking brake
Service
required
A fault has arisen:
•
•
•
Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the car has to be parked before a possible fault has been rectified, then the
wheels must be turned as if parking on a
hill and 1st gear engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be in position P (automatic gearbox).
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
Related information
•
08
278
Foot brake (p. 272)
08 Starting and driving
Fording
IMPORTANT
Fording means that the car is driven through a
water-covered roadway. Fording must be carried out with great caution.
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the
lubricating ability of the oils and shortens
the service life of these systems.
The car can be driven through water at a
maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum
speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be
exercised when passing through flowing
water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
•
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
•
Do not let the car stand with water over
the sills for any long period of time - this
could cause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of the engine stalling in water,
do not try restart - tow the car from the
water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Risk of engine
breakdown.
Overheating
Under special conditions, for example hard
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
a risk that the engine and drive system may
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driving with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer (p.
288).
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high then a warning symbol
is illuminated in the combined instrument
panel's information display and a text
message High engine temp Stop safely
is shown there - stop the car in a safe
way and allow the engine to run at idling
speed for several minutes in order to cool
down.
•
If the text message High engine temp
Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop
engine is shown then the engine must be
switched off after stopping the car.
•
In the event of overheating in the gearbox
a built-in protection function is activated
which, amongst other things, illuminates
a warning symbol in the combined instrument panel, and its display shows the
text message Transmission hot Reduce
speed or Transmission hot Stop safely
- follow the recommendation given and
lower the speed and stop the car in a safe
way and allow the engine to run at idling
Related information
•
•
Recovery (p. 298)
Towing (p. 295)
08
279
08 Starting and driving
speed for a few minutes in order to allow
the gearbox to cool down.
•
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
•
Do not turn the engine off immediately
you stop after a hard drive.
Driving with open tailgate
Overload - starter battery
When driving with the boot lid open, toxic
exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car
through the cargo area.
The electrical functions in the car load the
starter battery (p. 341) to varying degrees.
Avoid using the key position (p. 67) II when
the engine is switched off. Instead use the I
mode - which uses less power.
WARNING
Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxic
exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has
been switched off.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 144)
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the
engine is switched off. Examples of such
functions are:
•
•
•
•
ventilation fan
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low then the
combined instrument panel's information display shows the text Low battery Power
save mode. The energy-saving function then
shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan
and/or audio system.
–
08
280
In which case, charge the battery by starting the engine and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging
is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.
08 Starting and driving
Before a long journey
Winter driving
Before a long journey, it makes good sense to
go through the following points:
For winter driving it is important to perform
certain checks in order to ensure that the car
can be driven safely.
•
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if
there is a risk of snow or ice.
•
Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption (p. 383) is normal.
•
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
or other fluid).
•
•
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Carrying a warning triangle (p. 310) is a
legal requirement in certain countries.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 325)
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
306)
The engine coolant (p. 328) must contain
at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects
the engine against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To achieve optimum antifreeze protection, different types
of glycol must not be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold. For
more information on suitable oils, see
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
375).
Lamp replacement (p. 331)
starter battery and its capacity is reduced
by the cold.
Use washer fluid (p. 340) to avoid ice
forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres
are not permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the
08
281
08 Starting and driving
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing
Fuel filler flap - manual opening
Filling up with fuel
The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as
follows:
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
when electric opening from the passenger
compartment is not possible.
Important things to consider when refuelling.
Opening/closing the fuel cap
G024631
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on
the lighting panel - the flap opens when the
button is released.
1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
area (same side as fuel filler flap) and
locate the green cord with handle.
In the combined instrument panel's
display the arrow on the symbol indicates which side of the car the fuel cap is
located.
2. Pull the cord gently straight back until the
fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
•
•
282
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is
required to disengage the hatch lock.
Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in
until a click confirms that it is closed.
Related information
08
IMPORTANT
Filling up with fuel (p. 282)
Related information
•
Filling up with fuel (p. 282)
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank
in the event of high outside temperatures.
Open the cap slowly.
•
After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it
until one or more clicking sounds are
heard.
Filling up with fuel
•
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
08 Starting and driving
Filling with a fuel can14
Fuel - handling
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo
area. The funnel is located by the spare wheel
or in the well under the floor hatch.
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine
power and fuel consumption is negatively
affected.
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly
into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an openable cap and the funnel's pipe must be
moved past the cap before filling can begin.
Related information
•
•
Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 282)
Fuel - handling (p. 283)
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
guarantees, and any associated service
agreement. This applies to all engines.
NOTE: It does not apply to cars with
engines that are adapted to run on ethanol
fuel (E85).
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes.
NOTE
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed.
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that
could affect the car's performance.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Economical driving (p. 287)
Fuel - diesel (p. 284)
Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 287)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
383)
Fuel tank - volume (p. 382)
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could
cause spark build-up and ignite petrol
fumes, leading to fire and injury.
08
14
Only applies to cars with diesel engine.
283
08 Starting and driving
Fuel - petrol
Fuel - diesel
Petrol is used as fuel.
Diesel is used as fuel.
Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 95
and 98 RON. Only in exceptional cases
should 91 RON be used.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Diesel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to
contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively
high volumes of sulphur particles for example.
•
•
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum
performance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
•
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so
as not to damage the catalytic converter.
•
Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo.
Related information
•
•
•
08
•
15
284
Fuel - handling (p. 283)
Economical driving (p. 287)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
383)
Fuel tank - volume (p. 382)
At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,
which may lead to ignition problems. Special
diesel fuel designed for low temperatures
around freezing point is available from the
major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous
at low temperatures and reduces the risk of
paraffin precipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
The sulphur content must be a maximum
of 50 ppm.
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
•
•
•
Special additives
Marine diesel fuel
Heating oil
FAME15 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and
vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel
engine means that if the vehicle runs out of
fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the
workshop in order to restart the engine after
fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel
starvation, the fuel system needs a few
moments to carry out a check. Do this before
starting the engine, once the fuel tank has
been filled with diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end posi-
08 Starting and driving
tion, see Key positions (p. 66) for more
information.
2. Press the START button without
depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
3. Wait approx. 1 minute.
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake
and/or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a
risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Draining condensation from the fuel
filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from
the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine
operation.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel. For more information,
see Volvo service programme (p. 319).
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Related information
•
•
•
Fuel - handling (p. 283)
Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 287)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
383)
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close
to the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/
rhodium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a
chemical reaction without being used up
themselves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve
fuel economy (see Fuel consumption and
CO2 emissions (p. 383)).
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine.
This value is fed into an electronic system
that continuously controls the injectors. The
ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is
continuously adjusted. These adjustments
create optimal conditions for efficient combustion, and together with the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions
(hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous
oxides).
08
285
08 Starting and driving
||
Related information
•
•
•
Economical driving (p. 287)
Fuel - petrol (p. 284)
Fuel - diesel (p. 284)
Fuel - bioethanol E85
Bioetanol E85 is used as the fuel for the car's
engine.
Do not modify the fuel system or its components, and do not replace components with
parts that are not specifically designed for
use with bioethanol.
WARNING
Methanol must not be used. A decal on
the inside of the fuel filler flap shows the
correct alternative fuel.
The use of components not designed for
bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury
or engine damage.
Reserve fuel can
The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol. For more information, see Starting the
engine – Flexifuel (p. 251).
IMPORTANT
Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely
fastened and that its cap is sealed.
WARNING
08
286
Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive gases could form in the reserve fuel
can if it is refuelled with ethanol.
Related information
•
•
Fuel - handling (p. 283)
Economical driving (p. 287)
08 Starting and driving
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission control.
motorway. The car should then be driven for
approximately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
The following may arise during regeneration:
The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving. Socalled "regeneration" is started in order to
burn away the particles and empty the filter.
This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.
Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may
take a little longer at a low average speed.
Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances
in cold weather then the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature. This
means that regeneration of the diesel particle
filter does not take place and the filter is not
emptied.
When the filter has become approx. 80% full
of particles, a yellow warning triangle is
shown in the combined instrument panel, and
the message Soot filter full See manual is
shown in its information display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the
car until the engine reaches normal operating
temperature, preferably on a main road or
•
a smaller reduction of engine power
may be noticed temporarily
•
fuel consumption may increase temporarily
•
a smell of burning may arise.
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
When regeneration is complete the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine
and the filter is non-functional. Then there
is a risk that the filter will need to be
replaced.
Related information
•
•
•
Fuel - handling (p. 283)
•
Fuel tank - volume (p. 382)
Fuel - diesel (p. 284)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
383)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08
287
08 Starting and driving
||
•
•
Use the ECO Guide which indicates how
fuel-efficiently the car is being driven, see
Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 59).
•
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and
road - lower engine speeds result in lower
fuel consumption. Use the gear indicator
(p. 254).
•
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
•
High speed results in increased fuel consumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
•
Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
•
•
•
08
16
288
For lowest fuel consumption, activate
ECO (p. 270)*16.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select
ECO tyre pressure for best results, see
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 387).
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
•
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
•
A roof load and ski box increase air resistance, leading to higher consumption remove the load carriers when not in use.
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
For information about Volvo Car Corporation's environmental philosophy, see Volvo
Cars' environmental philosophy (p. 18).
For more information about fuel consumption,
see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
383).
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering
and brake servo.
Related information
•
•
Fuel - handling (p. 283)
•
Fuel tank - volume (p. 382)
Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the consumption.
Only applies to cars with automatic gearbox.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
383)
Driving with a trailer
When driving with a trailer there are a number
of important points to think about regarding
e.g. the towing bracket, the trailer and how
the load is positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
The total of the weight of the passengers and
all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see Weights
(p. 370).
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo,
then the car is delivered with the necessary
equipment for driving with a trailer.
•
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
•
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with
your Volvo dealer that the car is fully
equipped for driving with a trailer.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that
the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball
load.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure label location, see Tyres - air
pressure (p. 309).
•
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
08 Starting and driving
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven
at least 1000 km.
•
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
•
For safety reasons, the maximum permitted speed for the car when coupled with
a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow
the regulations in force for the permitted
speeds and weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer
has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable
approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does
not drag on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators are broken, then the combined instrument panel's symbol for direction indicators
flashes faster than normal and the information
display shows the text Bulb fail - Ind. signal
trailer.
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light
are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer text is shown.
Level control*
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the
maximum permissible weight). When the car
is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox (p.
290)
•
Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox
(p. 290)
•
•
Towing bracket/Towbar (p. 291)
Lamp replacement (p. 331)
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see Towing capacity and towball
load (p. 371).
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further
limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars
can be certified for higher towing weights
than the car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and
trailer may be difficult to control in the
event of sudden movement and braking.
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
289
08 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
•
Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm
(diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the
oil temperature may become too high.
Diesel engine 5-cyl
•
In the event of a risk of overheating the
optimal speed for the engine is
2300-3000 rpm for optimal circulation of
the coolant.
Driving with a trailer - automatic
gearbox
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
•
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine
speed.
•
In the event of overheating a warning
symbol is illuminated in the combined
instrument panel with a message that is
shown in the information display - follow
the recommendation given.
Steep inclines
•
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 288)
Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to
drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
08
290
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow
driving with a trailer for cars with the
Powershift automatic transmission, see
Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 258).
•
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
•
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving position D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving
off.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 255)
08 Starting and driving
Towing bracket/Towbar
Detachable towbar - storage
Detachable towbar - specifications
A towing bracket means that it is possible to
e.g. tow a trailer behind the car.
Store the detachable towbar in the cargo
area.
Specifications for detachable towbar.
If the car is equipped with a detachable/
removable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed
carefully, see Detachable towbar - attachment/removal (p. 292).
Specifications
WARNING
•
Follow the installation instructions
carefully.
•
The detachable section must be
locked with the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window
shows green.
G021485
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car,
firmly fastened with its strap.
Important checks
•
The towbar's towball must be cleaned
and greased regularly.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is
used, the towball must not be lubricated.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 288)
Related information
•
Detachable towbar - specifications (p.
291)
•
Detachable towbar - attachment/removal
(p. 292)
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 288)
08
291
08 Starting and driving
||
Detachable towbar - attachment/
removal
The attachment/removal of the detachable
towbar is performed in the following way:
G021488
Attaching
G018928
The indicator window must show red.
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
87
C
855
D
428
E
112
F
360
G
Side member
H
Ball centre
Related information
08
292
•
Detachable towbar - attachment/removal
(p. 292)
•
•
Detachable towbar - storage (p. 291)
Driving with a trailer (p. 288)
Remove the protective cover by first
and then pulling
pressing in the catch
.
the cover straight back
G021489
B
Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key
clockwise.
G021490
1127
G021487
A
The indicator window must show green.
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked
position. Remove the key from the lock.
Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
G021495
G021494
G000000
08 Starting and driving
Safety cable.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety
cable in the intended bracket.
Removing the towbar
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be
clean and dry.
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
08
}}
293
08 Starting and driving
||
Trailer stabiliser - TSA17
G018929
The trailer stability assist (TSA - Trailer
Stability Assist) function is designed to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins
to snake.
Push the protective cover until it snaps
tight.
Push in the locking wheel
and turn it
until you hear a click.
anticlockwise
Related information
•
•
•
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towbar rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in
the car, see Detachable towbar - storage
(p. 291).
08
17
294
Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
Detachable towbar - storage (p. 291)
Detachable towbar - specifications (p.
291)
Driving with a trailer (p. 288)
The trailer stability assist is included in the
stability and traction control system (p. 174)
(DSTC - Dynamic Stability and Traction
Control).
Function
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally
occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it
occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the
trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly
distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
even impossible to suppress. This makes the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example,
08 Starting and driving
end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
The trailer stability assist continually monitors
the car's movements, particularly lateral
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to
stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is
often enough to help the driver regain control
of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the
trailer stability assist comes into action, the
car/trailer combination is braked with all
wheels and engine power is reduced. Once
snaking has been gradually suppressed and
the car/trailer combination is stable once
again, the system stops regulating and the
driver once again has full control of the car.
For more information, see Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - operation (p.
175)
Miscellaneous
The trailer stability assist can engage within
the speed interval 60-160 km/h.
NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver
selects Sport mode, see Stability and
traction control system (DSTC) (p. 174).
The trailer stability assist may fail to engage if
the driver uses sudden steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in
such a situation the system cannot determine
whether it is the trailer or the driver that is
causing the snaking.
When the trailer stability assist is
working, the combined instrument
panel's DSTC symbol flashes.
Related information
•
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 176)
Towing
During towing, one vehicle is towed by
another vehicle using a tow rope.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed
with the wheels rolling forward.
Do not tow the vehicle at speeds higher
than 80 km/h or for distances in excess of
80 km.
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit
for towing before towing begins.
1. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch
and giving a long press on the START/
STOP ENGINE button - key position II is
activated, see Key positions (p. 66) for
more information about key positions.
2. The remote control key must remain in
the ignition switch while the car is being
towed.
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing
vehicle reduces speed by holding your
foot gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
08
295
08 Starting and driving
||
WARNING
•
Check that the steering lock is
unlocked before towing.
•
The remote control key must be in key
position II - in position I all airbags are
deactivated.
•
Never remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when the car
is being towed.
lubrication. If towing still has to take place,
the route must be as short as possible and
then with very low speed.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or
not the car is equipped with Powershift transmission, this can be verified by checking the
designation on the gearbox label under the
bonnet, see Type designations (p. 366). The
designation ”MPS6” means that it is
Powershift transmission - otherwise it is
Geartronic automatic transmission.
WARNING
IMPORTANT
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal.
Avoid towing.
•
However, the car can be towed for a
short distance at low speed to move it
from a dangerous position - not further
than 10 km and not faster than
10 km/h. Note that the car must
always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
•
In the event of moving a longer distance than 10 km, the car must be
transported with the drive wheels
raised from the road - professional
recovery is recommended.
Manual gearbox
Prior to towing:
–
Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
Prior to towing:
–
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Powershift
08
296
The model with Powershift transmission
should not be towed as it is dependent on the
engine running in order to receive sufficient
Prior to towing:
–
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine.
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start, see
Jump starting with battery (p. 252).
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged
during attempts to tow-start the engine.
Related information
•
Towing eye (p. 297)
08 Starting and driving
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side
of the bumper, front or rear.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants
which must be opened in different ways:
•
Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess,
turning it outwards. Then turn out the
cover completely and remove it.
•
The second variant has a marking
along one side or in a corner: Press the
marking with a finger and fold out the
opposite side/corner at the same time
using a coin or similar - the cover turns
around its axis and can then be
removed.
Attaching the towing eye
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck
or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
Related information
•
•
Towing (p. 295)
Recovery (p. 298)
After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
Take out the towing eye that is located
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car
up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible. If the
slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too
steep, or if the ground clearance under the
car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing
eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.
08
297
08 Starting and driving
Recovery
IMPORTANT
Recovery means that the vehicle is transported away by means of another vehicle.
Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward.
•
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car
up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible. If the
slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too
steep, or if the ground clearance under the
car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing
eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck
or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
08
298
An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with
raised front suspension must not be
towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It
should not be towed further than 50
km.
Related information
•
Towing (p. 295)
WHEELS AND TYRES
09 Wheels and tyres
09
Tyres - direction of rotation
NOTE
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction
of rotation marked with an arrow.
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have
the same type and dimension, and also the
same make.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified in the tyre pressure table (p. 387).
G021778
Related information
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
The tyre must always rotate in the same
direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should
only be switched between front and rear
positions, never between left and right-hand
sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted
incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics
and capacity to force rain and slush out of the
way are adversely affected. Tyres with the
greatest tread depth should always be fitted
to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of
skidding).
300
•
•
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 304)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 305)
Tyres - load index (p. 305)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 300)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 302)
Tyres - maintenance
Amongst other things, the function of the
tyres is to provide grip on the road surface,
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The
function can therefore be affected. This
applies to all tyres that are stored for future
use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are
cracks or discoloration.
09 Wheels and tyres
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh
tyres as possible when you replace them.
This is especially important with regard to
winter tyres. The last four digits in the
sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is
stated with four digits, for example 1510. The
tyre in the figure was manufactured in week
15 of 2010.
Summer and winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are
changed the wheels should be marked with
which side of the car they were mounted on,
for example L for left and R for right.
Wear and maintenance
Correct tyre pressure (p. 309) results in more
even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly
your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences
in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns
arising, the front and rear wheels can be
switched with each other. A suitable distance
for the first change is approx. 5000 km and
then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, the
least worn tyres must always be placed on
the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than
having the rear end skidding to one side,
resulting in possible complete loss of control
over the car. This is why it is important for the
rear wheels never to lose grip before the front
wheels.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
09
Tyres - dimensions (p. 304)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 305)
Tyres - load index (p. 305)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 300)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 302)
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up - and not standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
301
09 Wheels and tyres
09
Tyres - tread wear indicators
Wheel bolts
Tools
A tread wear indicator shows the status of the
tyre's tread.
Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at
the hubs and are available in different versions.
Amongst other things, the car contains towing
eye, jack* and wheel bolt wrench*.
IMPORTANT
G021829
The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140
Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts
and the bolts.
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread
Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth
is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be
level in height with the tread wear indicators.
Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth
provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
Only use rims that are tested and approved
by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the torque with a torque
wrench.
Locking wheel bolts*
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both
aluminium and steel rims. Under the cargo
area floor there is space for the sleeve for the
lockable wheel bolts.
Located under the cargo area floor are the
car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.
There is also space for the sleeve for the
lockable wheel bolts.
Related information
Related information
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
302
Tyres - dimensions (p. 304)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 305)
Tyres - load index (p. 305)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 300)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 300)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 304)
•
•
•
•
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 311)
Towing eye (p. 297)
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
306)
Wheel bolts (p. 302)
Jack* (p. 303)
09 Wheels and tyres
Jack*
IMPORTANT
A jack is used to raise the car, e.g. when
changing the tyres.
The original jack should only be used for
changing to the spare wheel. The jack's
thread must always be well greased.
Tools - returning into place
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
Related information
•
•
Warning triangle (p. 310)
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 311)
Winter tyres
09
Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for
winter road conditions.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter
tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted
to all four wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a
Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and
tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres
The tools and jack* must be returned to their
correct places after use. The jack needs to be
cranked together to the correct position in
order to have space.
The foam block and spare wheel are replaced
in the reverse order to taking out.
Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam
block. It must point forwards in the car.
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently
for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly
into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo
therefore recommends not to drive on winter
tyres that have a tread depth of less than
4 mm.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
303
09 Wheels and tyres
09
||
Using snow chains
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions
Tyres - dimensions
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car's wheels (wheel rims) and tyres have
a certain dimension, see the examples in the
table below.
The car has an approval for the complete
vehicle. This means that certain combinations
of wheel (wheel rim) and tyre are approved.
The car has an approval for the complete
vehicle. This means that certain combinations
of wheels (wheel rims) and tyres are
approved.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model,
and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event
of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
The wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to your car and lead to an accident.
Related information
•
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
7
Rim width in inches
J
Rim flange profile
16
Rim diameter in inches
50
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface
against the hub)
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
306)
Related information
•
•
304
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation: 225/50R17 98W.
225
Tyre width (mm)
50
Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R
Radial ply
17
Rim diameter in inches (")
98
Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
W
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this
case 270 km/h.)
Tyres - dimensions (p. 304)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 387)
09 Wheels and tyres
WARNING
19-inch wheels must never be used on
cars that are not equipped with the RDesign or Sport chassis options. The use
of 19-inch wheels on cars with standard
chassis constitutes a safety risk, with a
risk of vehicle damage, and it impairs the
car's driving characteristics.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 305)
Tyres - load index (p. 305)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 300)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 300)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 387)
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 304)
Tyres - load index
Tyres - speed ratings
Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a
certain load.
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed and therefore belongs to a particular
speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a
load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres.
Minimum permissible index is indicated in the
load index table.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 304)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 387)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 305)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 300)
09
Tyre speed class must at least correspond
with the car's top speed. Minimum speed rating is indicated in the speed rating table
below. The only exception to these regulations is the winter tyre (p. 303)1, where a
lower speed rating may be used. If such a
tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven
faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for
example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h). Traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the
speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table.
1
Q
160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T
190 km/h
H
210 km/h
V
240 km/h
Both metal-studded and studless tyres.
305
09 Wheels and tyres
09
||
W
270 km/h
Y
300 km/h
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which
have the same or a higher load index (p.
305) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre with too low a load index or
speed rating is used, it may overheat.
Related information
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 304)
Tyres - load index (p. 305)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 300)
Changing wheels - removing wheels
The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. winter wheels/winter tyres.
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as
possible. The car's handling may be altered
by the use of the spare wheel. The spare
wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The
car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not
machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is
fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow
chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive
cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be
repaired.
The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel
is stated in the tyre pressure table (p. 387).
IMPORTANT
•
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a
spare wheel on the car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted
with more than one "Temporary
Spare" wheel.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the outside down. The same bolt
runs through to secure the spare wheel and
306
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the foam block. The foam block contains all
the tools needed to change the wheels.
Taking out the spare wheel
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
and forwards.
2. Undo the retaining screw.
3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
Removing
Set up warning triangle (p. 310) if a wheel is
replaced in trafficked location. The car and
jack* must be on a firm horizontal surface.
1. Apply the parking brake, (p. 275) and
engage reverse gear, or position P if the
car has an automatic gearbox.
09 Wheels and tyres
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
that it is free from dirt.
4. Cars with steel rims have removable
wheel covers. Use the removal tool to
hook in and pull off any full-wheel wheel
covers. Alternatively, the wheel covers
can be pulled away by hand.
5. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* until the stop position in
accordance with the following figure.
09
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack*
that belongs to the car model in question,
which is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum
lifting height.
2. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and
removal tool for the wheel covers* located
under the cargo floor in the cargo area. If
another jack is selected, see Raising the
car (p. 320).
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground to
prevent them from rolling. Use heavy
wooden blocks or large stones for example.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into all
threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
6. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlockwise with the wheel wrench.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
307
09 Wheels and tyres
09
||
Related information
WARNING
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack
and the car's jacking point.
Changing wheels - fitting (p. 308)
Changing wheels - fitting
Jack* (p. 303)
It is important that the procedure for fitting
the wheel is carried out correctly.
Warning triangle (p. 310)
Fitting
Wheel bolts (p. 302)
1. Clean the contact surfaces between
wheel and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
G017465
7. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground.
•
•
•
•
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and
level.
8. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
308
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check
the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit any full wheel covers.
09 Wheels and tyres
NOTE
•
•
The car's regular jack is designed only for
use occasionally and for a short time, such
as when changing a wheel with a punctured tyre, switching between summer
tyres and winter tyres, etc. Only the jack
belonging to the specific model is to be
used to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel,
use of a garage jack is recommended. In
this instance, follow the instructions for
use that come with the equipment.
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must
be positioned over the valve on the wheel
rim during fitting.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
Tyres - air pressure
NOTE
Related information
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
306)
•
•
•
Jack* (p. 303)
09
Tyres can have different air pressures which
are measured in bar.
Check the air pressure in the tyres
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
This also applies to the car's spare wheel.
•
•
•
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre dimension
ECO pressure2
Spare wheel tyre pressure (Temporary
Spare)
Warning triangle (p. 310)
Wheel bolts (p. 302)
Park the car such that passengers have
the car, or ideally a crash barrier, between
themselves and the roadway.
2
ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
309
09 Wheels and tyres
||
NOTE
•
•
•
Warning triangle
Tyre pressure label
The warning triangle is used to warn other
road users of a stationary vehicle.
Check the tyre pressure when the
tyres are cold. "Cold tyres" means that
the tyres are at the same temperature
as the outdoor temperature. The tyres
will heat up and the tyre pressures will
increase after driving for a few kilometres.
Tyre pressures which are too low will
increase fuel consumption, reduce tyre
service life and impair the car's handling. Driving with tyre pressures
which are too low may lead to the
tyres overheating and sustaining damage. Tyre pressures affect ride comfort, road noise and steering.
Tyre pressure decreases over time,
this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre
pressure also varies depending on
ambient temperature.
Storage and folding up
G021830
09
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows which pressures the tyres should have
at different loads and speed conditions. This
is also specified in the tyre pressure table,
see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 387).
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
In order to obtain optimum fuel economy at
speeds below 160 km/h an ECO pressure is
recommended (applies to both full and light
load), see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p.
387).
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
310
Tyres - dimensions (p. 304)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 305)
Tyres - load index (p. 305)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 300)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 302)
09 Wheels and tyres
The warning triangle is fitted on the inside of
the boot lid with two clips.
First aid kit*
Emergency puncture repair*
The first aid box contains first aid equipment.
Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 387).
Detach the warning triangle case by pulling both of the snap latches outwards.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose
sides.
The emergency puncture repair kit (p. 313)
consists of a compressor and a bottle of sealant. The sealing works as a temporary repair.
The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced
before its expiration date and after use. The
sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured
in the tread.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a
suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
09
NOTE
A case with first aid equipment is located in
the cargo area.
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture
in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures
in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger
slits, cracks or similar damage. Connect the
compressor to one of the car's 12 V sockets.
Choose the socket that is nearest to the
punctured tyre.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
311
09 Wheels and tyres
09
||
IMPORTANT
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets (p. 142) in the tunnel console then no
other current consumer may be connected
to the other one.
NOTE
Emergency puncture repair kit* location
IMPORTANT
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets (p. 142) in the tunnel console then no
other current consumer may be connected
to the other one.
Emergency puncture repair kit (TMK Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a
puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 387).
Location of the emergency puncture
repair kit
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Related information
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair* - operation
(p. 313)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 313)
•
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
(p. 315)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant
(p. 317)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 313)
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 311)
•
Tools (p. 302)
The emergency puncture repair kit is located
under the floor in the cargo area.
Set up the warning triangle (p. 310) if a tyre is
being sealed in a trafficked location.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture
in the tread.
312
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair kit* overview
Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 387).
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - location
(p. 312)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant
(p. 317)
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 311)
Emergency puncture repair* operation
09
Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 387).
Emergency puncture repair
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
For information on the function of the parts, see
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p.
313).
Pressure gauge
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
313
09 Wheels and tyres
09
||
1. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed (which is fitted on one side of the
compressor) and affix it to the steering
wheel.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
been used. Volvo recommends that you
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there
can determine whether or not the tyre can
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
2. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
3. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
314
4. Screw the bottle into its holder.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Connect the hose from the compressor to
the valve.
6. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
NOTE
If the compressor is connected to one of
the two 12 V sockets, in the tunnel console, no other current consumer must be
connected to the other one.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
7. Flick the switch to position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the
compressor is running. If cracks or
unevenness arise then the compressor
must be switched off immediately. The
journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
8. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
09 Wheels and tyres
9. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum
3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the
hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
authorised tyre centre is recommended.
Emergency puncture repair* rechecking
Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 387).
12. As soon as possible, drive approximately
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Related information
•
•
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 311)
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
(p. 315)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 313)
09
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched
off. Detach the air hose and cable.
Check tyre pressure
Fit the valve cap.
1. Reconnect the equipment.
NOTE
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
If it is below 1.3 bar3 then the tyre is
insufficiently sealed. The journey
should not be continued. Contact a
tyre centre.
•
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
bar3, the tyre must be inflated to the
pressure specified in accordance with
the tyre pressure table, see Tyres approved tyre pressures (p. 387).
Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.
10. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
11. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and
fit the valve cap.
WARNING
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
3
1 bar = 100 kPa.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
315
09 Wheels and tyres
09
||
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
been used. Volvo recommends that you
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there
can determine whether or not the tyre can
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Emergency puncture repair kit* inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated using
the compressor in the emergency puncture
repair kit (p. 313).
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the
bottom of the thread on the tyre's air
valve.
Related information
•
•
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 311)
Emergency puncture repair* - operation
(p. 313)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 313)
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's
12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I.
316
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table,
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 387).
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
6. Switch off the compressor Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Related information
•
•
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 311)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 313)
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
(p. 315)
09 Wheels and tyres
09
Emergency puncture repair kit* sealant
The container (bottle) with the emergency
puncture repair kit (p. 313) contains sealant
and it can be replaced.
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 311)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
317
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
10 Maintenance and service
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the
personnel, special tools and service literature
to guarantee the highest quality of service.
10
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
•
Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 331)
319
10 Maintenance and service
Raising the car
10
When raising the car it is important that the
jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended
points on the car's underbody.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions
supplied with the equipment.
320
10 Maintenance and service
10
Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a front workshop jack
then it must be positioned under one of the
four lifting points furthest in under the car. If
the car is raised with a rear workshop jack
then it must be positioned under one of the
lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack
is positioned so that the car cannot slide off
the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.
If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop
lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be
positioned under the outer lifting points (jacking points). Alternatively, the inner lifting
points can be used at the front.
Related information
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
306)
321
10 Maintenance and service
Bonnet - opening and closing
10
The bonnet can be opened when the handle
by the pedals has been pulled backwards,
and the lock by the grille has been moved to
the left.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Engine compartment - overview
The overview shows normal checking points.
Engine compartment 4 cyl. 2.0 l1
Related information
•
•
Engine compartment - checking (p. 324)
Engine compartment - overview (p. 322)
The appearance of the engine compartment may
differ depending on engine variant.
Filling engine oil
Coolant expansion tank
G010951
Power steering fluid reservoir
1
322
Radiator
Pull the handle by the pedals. You will
hear when the catch releases.
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid
(located on the driver's side)
Move the catch to the left and open the
bonnet. (The catch hook is located
between the headlamp and grille, see
illustration.)
Relay and fuse box
Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine - see instead the following heading "Engine compartment except 4-cyl. 2.0 l".
Battery
10 Maintenance and service
Filling washer fluid
Filling washer fluid
Engine compartment except 4 cyl. 2.0 l2
Air filter
Air filter
WARNING
WARNING
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition
coil when the car's electrical system is in
key position II or when the engine is hot.
The ignition system has very high voltage
and output. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The car's electrical system must always be in key position
0 when work is being performed in the
engine compartment; see Key positions functions at different levels (p. 67).
G018945
The ignition system has very high voltage
and output. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The car's electrical system must always be in key position
0 when work is being performed in the
engine compartment; see Key positions functions at different levels (p. 67).
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition
coil when the car's electrical system is in
key position II or when the engine is hot.
The appearance of the engine compartment may
differ depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil
dipstick3
10
Related information
•
•
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 322)
Engine compartment - checking (p. 324)
Radiator
Filling engine oil
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid
(located on the driver's side)
Battery
Relay and fuse box
2
3
Also applies to the B4204T7 engine.
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
323
10 Maintenance and service
10
Engine compartment - checking
Engine oil - general
Some oils and fluids should be checked at
regular intervals.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied.
Regular checking
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
•
•
•
•
Coolant
Power steering fluid
Washer fluid
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a
workshop. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
324
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
Engine oil
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment,
behind the radiator) may start automatically some after the engine has been
switched off.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
375).
Volvo recommends:
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 322)
Engine compartment - overview (p. 322)
Coolant - level (p. 328)
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 325)
Power steering fluid - level (p. 330)
Washer fluid - filling (p. 340)
Volvo uses different systems for warning of
low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure.
Certain engine variants have an oil pressure
sensor, and then the combined instrument
panel's warning symbol for low oil pressure is
used. Other variants have an oil level sensor,
when the driver is informed via the instrument's warning symbol
and display
10 Maintenance and service
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade; see Engine oil - adverse driving
conditions (p. 375).
Engine oil - checking and filling
The oil level is checked on certain engine variants with the electronic oil level sensor, on
other engine variants with the oil dipstick.
For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade
and volume (p. 376).
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
Related information
Measurement and filling if required
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 325)
G021734
•
Dipstick and filler pipe.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially important before the first scheduled oil
change.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level
every 2 500 km. The most accurate measurements are made on a cold engine before starting. The measurement will be inaccurate if
taken immediately after the engine is
switched off. The dipstick will indicate that
the level is too low because the oil has not
had time to flow down into the oil sump.
4
10
Engine with oil dipstick4
G021737
texts. Certain variants have both systems.
Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching off the engine it is important to wait
5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back
to the sump.
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres
should be added. If the level is significantly below, then an additional amount
is required.
6. If required, check the level again, do it
after driving a short distance. Then repeat
steps 1-4.
Does not apply to the 4-cyl. 2.0 litre or 5-cyl. diesel, which have electronic oil level sensor. However, does apply to the B4204T7 engine.
325
10 Maintenance and service
||
WARNING
IMPORTANT
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level
should never be above MAX or below MIN
as this could lead to engine damage.
10
If notified of low oil level, only fill with the
volume specified, for example, 0.5 litres.
NOTE
WARNING
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car
must have been driven approx. 30 km and
have been stationary for 2 hours with the
engine switched off and on level ground
before oil level indication is correct.
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
Engine with electronic oil level sensor,
4-cyl. 2.0 l5
Message and graph in the display. The left-hand
display shows the digital combined instrument
panel and the right-hand the analogue.
Message
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic
oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see Menu navigation combined instrument panel (p. 100).
WARNING
Filler pipe.6
You do not need to take action with respect
to the engine oil level before a message is
shown in the display, see the illustration
below.
5
6
326
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may
be too high.
Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine - see instead the earlier heading "Engine with oil dipstick".
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
Measuring the oil level, 4-cyl. 2.0 l
If the oil level needs to be checked then it
should be carried out in accordance with the
sequence below.
1. Activate key position II; see Key positions
- functions at different levels (p. 67).
10 Maintenance and service
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position Oil level.
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
Engine with electronic oil level sensor,
5-cyl. diesel
10
For more information on menu navigation, see Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel (p. 100).
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level are not met (time after engine shutdown, the car's inclination, outside temperature, etc.) then the message Not
available will be shown. This does not
mean that there is something wrong in the
car's systems.
Filler pipe.7
You do not need to take action with respect
to the engine oil level before a message is
shown in the display, see the illustration
below.
Message and graph in the display. The left-hand
display shows the digital combined instrument
panel and the right-hand the analogue.
Message
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic
oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see Menu navigation combined instrument panel (p. 100).
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may
be too high.
7
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
}}
327
10 Maintenance and service
||
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low
Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.
10
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position Oil level.
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
For more information on menu navigation, see Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel (p. 100).
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system
during driving. The system cannot directly
detect changes when the oil is filled or
drained. The car must be driven
about 30 km before the oil level display is
correct.
Coolant - level
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature.
The heat that is transferred from the engine to
the coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment.
The coolant level must lie between the MIN
and MAX marks on the expansion tank.
Checking the level and topping up
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
The level must never be above MAX or
below MIN, as this could lead to engine
damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
Measuring the oil level, 5-cyl. diesel
If the oil level needs to be checked then it
should be carried out in accordance with the
sequence below.
1. Activate key position II; see Key positions
- functions at different levels (p. 67).
328
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill
more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recommended filling level is 4. Message and graph in
the display. The left-hand display shows the digital combined instrument panel and the righthand the analogue.
Related information
•
Engine oil - general (p. 324)
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather
conditions. Never top up with water only. The
risk of freezing increases with both too little
and too much coolant concentrate.
10 Maintenance and service
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the
expansion tank cap slowly to gently
release the overpressure.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality; see Coolant - grade and volume (p. 378).
IMPORTANT
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could
occur, causing a risk of damage to the
engine.
•
When changing coolant/replacing
cooling system components, flush the
cooling system clean with approved
quality tap water or flush with readymixed coolant.
•
The engine must only be run with a
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise,
temperatures that are too high may
occur resulting in the risk of damage
(cracks) in the cylinder head.
Brake and clutch fluid - level
Brake and clutch fluid level should be
between the reservoir MIN and MAX marks.
Checking the level
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir. The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir. Check the level regularly.
10
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended brake fluid
grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume (p.
381). The fluid should be changed annually on
cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains
or tropical climates with high humidity.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
Volvo recommends that the reason for the
loss of brake fluid is investigated by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
329
10 Maintenance and service
||
Filling
Power steering fluid - level
The power steering fluid level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks. The fluid
does not need to be changed.
10
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the
cover over the cold zone in the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed
first before the reservoir cap can be reached.
Turn and open the cover located on the
covering.
Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the
fluid. The level must be between the MIN
and MAX marks, which are located on
the inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
330
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking. The
cover must not be opened.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The fluid level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks. For recommended fluid grade, see Power steering
fluid - grade (p. 381).
NOTE
If a fault should arise in the power steering
system, or if the engine is switched off and
must be towed, then the car can still be
steered.
10 Maintenance and service
Climate control system - fault tracing
and repair
The air conditioning system must only be
serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when
looking for leaks.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
Related information
•
Volvo service programme (p. 319)
Lamp replacement
Lamp replacement can be carried out for
bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps,
please refer to a workshop.
The bulbs are specified (p. 338). The following list contains locations of bulbs and other
light sources that are specialised, such as
LED8 lamps, or are unsuitable for changing
for some other reason, except at a workshop:
•
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
lamps)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Position/parking lamps front
Daytime running lights
Side direction indicators, door mirrors
Approach lighting, door mirrors
Interior lighting
Glovebox lighting
Position/parking lamps rear
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be carried out at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. Working
with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped
with a high voltage unit.
10
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in key
position 0 for bulb replacement; see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p.
67).
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs
with your fingers. Grease from your fingers
is vaporised by the heat, coating the
reflector and then causing damage.
Side marker lamps rear
Brake light.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
8
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
331
10 Maintenance and service
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
have condensation on the inside of the
lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is
designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
when the lamp has been switched on for a
time.
10
Lamp replacement - headlamps
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
engine compartment. First loosen and remove
the whole headlamp.
Removing the headlamp
Set the car's electrical system in key position
0, see Key positions - functions at different
levels (p. 67).
Detach the headlamp connector by
pressing down the clip with your thumb.
Related information
•
•
Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 332)
At the same time, guide out the connector with your other hand.
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps (p. 336)
•
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 337)
•
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area
(p. 337)
•
Lamp replacement - number plate lighting
(p. 337)
5. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
6. Replace the bulb in question.
Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
Pull the headlamp straight forward.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the
connector.
332
G010325
||
Securing the headlamp
1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound
should be heard.
2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.
Check that they are correctly inserted.
3. Check the lighting.
The headlamp must be mounted and the connector correctly installed before the lighting is
switched on or the remote control key is
inserted into the ignition switch.
10 Maintenance and service
Lamp replacement (p. 331)
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs (p. 333)
Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by
releasing the headlamp's larger cover.
Related information
The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the
headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
Lamps - specifications (p. 338)
10
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
Before starting to replace a bulb, see Lamp
replacement - headlamps (p. 332).
1. Open the lock clamp by pressing up/out.
2. Press down the clips on the cover and
remove it.
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 332)
Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p.
333)
G021746
•
Lamp replacement - dipped beam
G021745
•
•
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 332).
2. Remove the cover (p. 333).
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder
downwards.
5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it
in. It can be secured in one position.
Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 334)
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Lamp replacement - extra main beam (p.
334)
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 338)
333
10 Maintenance and service
Lamp replacement - main beam
Lamp replacement - extra main beam
The main beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.
The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the
headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
10
NOTE
The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside
the headlamp's smaller cover.
Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 332).
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 332).
2. Remove the cover (p. 333).
2. Remove the cover (p. 333).
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out.
3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder
downwards.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can be secured in one position.
5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it
in. It can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
•
334
G021748
G021747
G021750
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
Lamp replacement - direction
indicators front
Lamps - specifications (p. 338)
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lamps - specifications (p. 338)
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 332).
2. Remove the small round cover.
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb.
4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new
one. It can only be installed in one way.
5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and
press until a clicking sound is heard.
6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and
pressed in until a clicking sound is heard.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 338)
10 Maintenance and service
Lamp replacement - side marker
lamps front
Related information
•
The side marker lamp's bulb is fitted inside
the headlamp's smaller cover.
Lamps - specifications (p. 338)
Lamp replacement - rear lamp
Rear direction indicators, rear fog lamp and
reversing lamp are replaced from inside the
cargo area.
10
Before starting to replace a bulb, see Lamp
replacement - headlamps (p. 332).
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the small round cover.
G021754
G021751
Lamp housing, rear
The bulbs in the rear light cluster are replaced
from inside the cargo area (not the LED
lamps).
3. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the
bulb holder.
1. Remove the covers in the left/right-hand
panel to access the bulbs. The bulbs are
located in separate bulb holders.
4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new
one. It can only be installed in one way.
2. Press the catches together and pull out
the bulb holder.
5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and
press until a clicking sound is heard.
3. Replace the bulb.
6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and
pressed in until a clicking sound is heard.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
4. Plug in the connector.
5. Press the bulb holder into place and refit
the cover.
335
10 Maintenance and service
||
Related information
10
•
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps (p. 336)
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 338)
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps
The overview shows the location of the lamps
at the rear.
Rear lamp cluster bulb holder
Reversing lamp (p. 335)
Rear fog lamp (p. 335)
Indicator (p. 335)
Brake light (LED)
Reversing lamp (p. 335)
Rear fog lamp (p. 335)
Indicator (p. 335)
Position/parking lights (LED)
Side marker lamps (LED)
336
Related information
•
•
Lamp replacement (p. 331)
Lamps - specifications (p. 338)
10 Maintenance and service
Lamp replacement - number plate
lighting
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo
area
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror
lighting
The number plate lighting is located under the
tailgate handle.
The cargo area lighting is located in the boot
lid.
The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the
lamp lenses.
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing
and withdraw it.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it
into place.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 338)
10
G021758
G021756
Removal of lamp lens
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so
that the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 338)
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens
and gently prize up the lock lugs on the
edge.
2. Snap off the lamp lens.
3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight out to the side and replace with a
new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with
the pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could
then be crushed.
Attaching the lamp lens
1. Refit the lamp lens.
2. Press it into place.
337
10 Maintenance and service
||
Related information
•
10
338
Lamps - specifications (p. 338)
Lamps - specifications
The specifications apply to bulbs. When
replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer
to a workshop.
Lighting
WA
Type
Dipped beam, halogen
55
H7 LL
Main beam, Halogen
65
H9
Extra main beam,
ABL
55
H7 LL
Front direction
indicators
21
H21W LL
Side marker lamps
front
5
W5W LL
Glovebox lighting
5
Socket SV8.5
Length 43 mm
Vanity mirror lighting
2
T5 Socket
W2x4.6d
Cargo area lighting
5
Socket SV8.5
Length 38 mm
Number plate
lighting
5
C5W LL
Direction indicators, rear
21
PY21W SV
Lighting
WA
Type
Reversing lamp
21
P21W LL
Rear fog lamp
21
P21W LL
A
Watt
Related information
•
•
•
Lamp replacement (p. 331)
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps (p. 336)
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 337)
10 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service position when they are to be replaced.
Service position
1. Place the remote control key in the ignition lock9 and briefly press the START/
STOP ENGINE button to set the car's
electrical system to key position I. For
detailed information on key positions, see
Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 67).
Replacing the wiper blades
10
2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the car’s electrical
system in key position 0.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk
switch up and hold it in position for
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing
straight up.
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to make replacement possible, to
clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off
ice from the windscreen, for example), they
must be in service position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the
service position, make sure that they are
not frozen down.
9
Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.
The wipers return to their starting position
when you briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical system to key position I (or when the car is
started).
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the wipers are allowed to
return to their starting position. This is to
avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
}}
339
10 Maintenance and service
||
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Press the button located on
the wiper blade mounting and pull
straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
10
Cleaning
Washer fluid - filling
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen,
see Car washing (p. 359).
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps and windows. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used during winter.
IMPORTANT
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard.
Check the blades regularly. Neglected
maintenance shortens the service life of
the wiper blades.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the
windscreen.
Related information
The wipers return from service position to
their starting position when you briefly press
the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the
car’s electrical system to key position I (or
when the car is started).
•
Washer fluid - filling (p. 340)
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
G021763
Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the
winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the passenger side.
340
For capacities, see Washer fluid - quality and
volume (p. 381).
Related information
•
Wiper blades (p. 339)
10 Maintenance and service
Battery
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.
The starter battery is a traditional 12 V battery.
•
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tightened.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotainment may be temporarily disengaged,
and/or the message in the information display about the main battery's state of
charge may be temporarily inapplicable,
following the connection of an external
battery or battery charger:
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and
climate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore
needs to be recharged if the car is not
used for a longer time or when it is only
driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be
used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car
chassis may be used as the grounding point.
See Jump starting with battery (p. 252) for
a description of how the cable clamps
must be attached.
10
To maintain the battery in good condition,
at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic
trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Related information
•
•
•
Battery - symbols (p. 342)
Starter battery - replacement (p. 342)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 344)
IMPORTANT
Only a traditional battery charger should
ever be used when charging the battery.
341
10 Maintenance and service
Battery - symbols
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
There are information and warning symbols
on the battery.
10
Symbols on the battery
The starter battery is a traditional 12 V battery.
Use protective goggles.
Risk of explosion.
Further information is
available in the owner's
manual.
Must be taken for recycling.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
NOTE
The battery contains corrosive acid.
An expended battery must be recycled in
an environmentally safe manner as it contains lead.
Related information
•
342
Starter battery - replacement
The starter battery in the car can be replaced
without the help of a workshop.
Battery (p. 341)
Removal
First of all: Take the remote control key from
the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes
before any electrical connections are touched
- this is because the car's electrical system
needs to store the necessary information to
control modules.
10 Maintenance and service
Remove the rear cover by screwing one
quarter turn and lifting it away.
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and negative cables in the correct order.
Detach the black negative cable.
Detach the red positive cable.
Detach the ventilation hose from the battery.
Loosen the screw holding the battery
clamp.
Move the battery aside.
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
10
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See earlier section "Removal".)
8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See "Removal".)
9. Align the front cover and secure it with
the clips. (See "Removal".)
For more information on the car's battery Electrical system (p. 389).
Lift it up.
Fitting
Open the clips on the front cover and
remove the cover.
Release the rubber moulding so that the
rear cover is free.
343
10 Maintenance and service
Battery - Start/Stop
10
IMPORTANT
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful battery for starting and one support battery that helps during the Start/Stop function's starting sequence.
When replacing batteries in cars with the
Start/Stop function, the AGM10 type batteries must be fitted.
NOTE
For more information on Start/Stop - see
Start/Stop* (p. 261).
For more information on the car's battery see Jump starting with battery (p. 252) and
Starter battery - specification (p. 390).
Battery
Starting
Auxiliary
760
180
SizeB,
L×W×H
(mm)
278×175×190
150×90×130
Capacity
(Ah)
70
10
Cold start
capacityA,
CCA (A)
A
B
10
11
12
344
Location of the batteries
•
The higher the current take-off in the
car (extra cooling/heating, etc.) the
more the batteries must be charged =
increased fuel consumption.
•
When the capacity of the battery has
fallen below the lowest permissible
level then the Start/Stop function is
disengaged.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due
to high current take-off means:
•
The engine starts automatically11 without
the driver depressing the clutch pedal
(manual gearbox).
•
The engine starts automatically without
the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot
brake pedal (automatic gearbox).
In accordance with the SAE standard.
Largest possible size.
Absorbed Glass Mat
Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
See Battery (p. 341) for a detailed description of the starter battery.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car.
(1) Starter battery12 (2) Support battery.
The support battery normally requires no
more service than the normal battery used for
starting. A workshop should be contacted in
the event of questions or problems - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
10 Maintenance and service
IMPORTANT
NOTE
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of
an external battery or battery charger:
If the battery has become so discharged
that everything is "black" and in principle
the car does not have all the normal electrical functions and the engine is subsequently started using an external battery or
battery charger, then the Start/Stop function will be activated. It will then be possible for the engine to be auto-stopped but
in the event of an auto-stop the Start/Stop
function may fail to auto-start the engine
due to inadequate capacity in the battery.
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be
used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car
chassis may be used as the grounding point.
See Jump starting with battery (p. 252) for
a description of how the cable clamps
must be attached.
The battery must first be charged in order
to ensure a successful auto-start after an
auto-stop. At an outside temperature of
+15 °C the battery needs to be charged for
at least 1 hour. At a lower outside temperature a charging time of 3-4 hours is
recommended. The recommendation is
that the battery is charged using an external battery charger.
If this is not possible then the recommendation is to temporarily deactivate the
Start/Stop function until the battery has
been adequately recharged.
For more information on charging the
starter battery, see Battery (p. 341).
Related information
•
Battery - symbols (p. 342)
Fuses - general
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to
protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
10
If an electrical component or function does
not work, it may be because the component's
fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If
the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a
fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that
you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the
fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has
blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new
fuse of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with
an amperage higher than that specified
when replacing a fuse. This could cause
significant damage to the electrical system
and possibly lead to fire.
345
10 Maintenance and service
||
Location of central electrical units
10
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change
sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Under the glovebox
Cargo area
Engine compartment cold zone (only
Start/Stop)
Related information
•
•
•
•
346
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 347)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 351)
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 353)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 356)
•
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 357)
10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect
engine and brake functions, amongst other
things.
10
}}
347
10 Maintenance and service
||
General fuses, engine compartment
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
10
Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Engine compartment, lower
These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. The fuses in (C) are located
under (A).
On the inside of the cover is a label that
shows the location of the fuses.
•
•
•
13
348
Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi
Fuse" type and must only be replaced by
a workshop13.
Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE"
type and should be replaced by a workshop13
Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini
Fuse" type.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function
A
Function
A
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM) under
the gloveboxA
50
ABS pump
40
ABS valves
20
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM) under
the glovebox
50
Headlamp washer*
20
10
Primary fuse for central electrical unit in cargo areaA
60
Headlamp levelling*; Active
Xenon headlamps - ABL*
20
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box
under the gloveboxA
60
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM) under
the glovebox
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box
under the gloveboxA
60
ABS
5
Adjustable steering force*
5
10
10
–
–
Electric additional heater*A
100
Engine control module; Transmission control module; Airbags
Heated windscreen*, left-hand
side
40
Heated washer nozzles*
Windscreen wipers
30
Parking heater*
25
Ventilation fanA
40
Heated windscreen*, righthand side
40
–
–
Light switches
5
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Maintenance and service
Function
A
Function
A
Function
A
Relay coils
5
10
20
Horn
15
20
Relay coil in main relay for
engine management system;
Engine control module (4-cyl.
2.0 lB, 5, 6-cyl.)
10
Engine control module (4-cyl.
2.0 lB); Ignition coils (5, 6-cyl.
petrol); Capacitor (6-cyl.)
Engine control module (petrol
except 4-cyl. 2.0 lC)
10
Valves (1.6 l petrol); mass air
flow sensor (1.6 l, 4-cyl. 2.0 lB);
Thermostat (4-cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); EVAP valve (4-cyl. 2.0 l
petrolB); Cooling valve for climate control system (4-cyl. 2.0
l diesel); Cooling pump for EGR
(4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel)
10
Auxiliary lamps*
Ignition coils (1.6 l petrol,
engine B4204T7); Glow control
module (5-cyl. diesel)
Transmission control module
15
Engine control module (1.6 l
diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)
15
Solenoid clutch A/C (not 4-cyl.
2.0 lC, not 5-cyl. diesel); Supporting coolant pump (4-cyl.
2.0 l diesel)
15
Engine control module (4-cyl.
2.0 lB)
20
Relay coil in relay for solenoid
clutch A/C (not 5-cyl. diesel);
Relay coil in relay for coolant
pump (1.6 l petrol Start/Stop);
Relay coils in central electrical
unit in engine compartment
cold zone (Start/Stop)
5
Start relayA
30
10
Mass air flow sensor (engine
D4162T); Control valve, fuel
flow (engine D4162T)
Mass air flow sensor (5-cyl.
diesel, 6-cyl.); Control valves
(5-cyl. diesel); Injectors (5, 6cyl. petrol); Engine control
module (5-cyl. petrol, 6-cyl.)
15
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
349
10 Maintenance and service
||
10
350
Function
A
Function
A
Function
A
Solenoid clutch A/C (5, 6-cyl.);
Valves (1.6 l, engine B4204T7;
5-cyl., 6-cyl.); Engine control
module (6-cyl.); Solenoids (6cyl. without turbo); Actuator
motors, intake manifold (6-cyl.
without turbo); Mass air flow
sensor (engine B4204T7; 5-cyl.
petrol); Oil level sensor (5-cyl.
diesel)
10
Coolant pump (1.6 l petrol
Start/Stop); Crankcase ventilation heater (5-cyl. petrol); Oil
pump automatic gearbox(5-cyl.
petrol Start/Stop)
10
Cooling fan (1.6 l, 4-cyl. 2.0 l
petrol, 5-cyl. petrol)
60
Cooling fan (6-cyl., 4-cyl. 2.0 l
diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)
80
Ignition coils (4-cyl. 2.0 l petrolB)
15
Power steering
100
Diesel filter heater
20
Control module, radiator roller
cover (5-cyl. petrol)
5
Crankcase ventilation heater
(5-cyl. diesel); Oil pump automatic gearbox (5-cyl. diesel
Start/Stop)
10
Solenoid clutch A/C (4-cyl.
2.0 lB); Glow control module (4cyl. 2.0 l diesel); Oil pump (4cyl. 2.0 l diesel)
15
Coolant pump (4-cyl. 2.0 l petrolB)
50
Glow plugs (diesel)
70
Valves (4-cyl. 2.0 lB); Oil pump
(4-cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); Lambdasond, centre (4-cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); Lambda-sond, rear (4-cyl.
2.0 l diesel)
15
Lambda-sonds (1.6 l petrol,
engine B4204T7); Lambdasond (5-cyl. diesel); Control
module, radiator roller cover
(1.6 l diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)
10
Lambda-sond, front (4-cyl.
2.0 lB); Lambda-sond, rear (4cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); EVAP valve
(5, 6-cyl. petrol); Lambdasonds (5, 6-cyl. petrol)
15
A
B
C
For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is
empty - see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's
cold zone (p. 357).
Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine.
However, does apply to the B4204T7 engine.
Related information
•
•
•
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 351)
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 353)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 356)
10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - under glovebox
Fuses under the glovebox protect the infotainment and seat functions, amongst other
things.
Positions
Function
A
Primary fuse for audio control
module*; Primary fuse for fuses
16-20: Infotainment
40
10
Function
A
Function
A
Analogue clock (Executive)
5
20
–
–
Control panel, rear passenger
door, right
Control panel, rear passenger
door, left
20
Keyless*
20
Power seat driver's side*
20
Power seat passenger side*
20
–
–
12 V socket cargo area*; Refrigerator*
–
–
Control panel, driver's door
20
Control panel, front passenger
door
20
Heated steering wheel*
10
15
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
351
10 Maintenance and service
||
10
Function
A
Function
A
–
–
5
Infotainment control module
5
Parking assistance*; Parking
camera*; Towbar control module*
Audio control unit (amplifier)*,
Digital radio*; TV*
10
AWD control module*
15
Audio
15
Active chassis - Four-C*
10
Telematics*; Bluetooth*
5
Multimedia system for rear seat
(RSE)*
352
7,5
Sunroof*; Interior lighting roof;
Climate sensor*; Damper
motors, air intake
5
12 V socket, tunnel console
15
Seat heating, rear right*
15
Seat heating, rear left*
15
Massage seats, front*; Armrest
lighting*; Refrigerator lighting*;
Relay coil in relay for refrigerator*
15
Seat heating (passenger side)
15
Seat heating (driver's side)
15
Related information
•
•
•
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 347)
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 353)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 356)
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 357)
10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - in the control module under
the glovebox
Fuses in the control module under the glovebox protect airbag and collision warning system functions, amongst other things.
Positions
Function
A
–
–
–
–
Interior lighting; Driver's door
control panel, power windows;
Remote controlled garage door
opener*; Power seats, front*
7,5
10
Function
A
Function
A
Combined instrument panel
5
–
–
Adaptive cruise control, ACC*;
collision warning system*
10
Windscreen washer
15
Interior lighting; Rain sensor
7,5
Unlocking, boot lid
10
Steering wheel module
7,5
Folding head restraint*
10
Central locking system, fuel
filler flap
10
Fuel pump
20
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
353
10 Maintenance and service
||
10
Function
A
Movement detector alarm*; Climate panel
5
Steering lock
15
Siren*; Data link connector
OBDII
5
–
–
Airbags
10
Collision warning*
5
Accelerator pedal sensor; Dimming interior rearview mirror*;
Seat heating, rear*
•
7,5
Electric additional heater*
Infotainment control module
(Performance); Audio (Performance)
15
Brake lights
5
Sunroof*
20
Immobiliser
5
Related information
•
•
•
354
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 347)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 351)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 356)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 357)
10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - by instrument panel
The fuse is located behind the side panel on
the passenger side.
10
Fuse
NOTE
For any fuse replacement the recommendation is that the car is taken into an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Function
A
Analogue clock (Executive)
5
Related information
•
•
•
Fuses - general (p. 345)
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 353)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 351)
355
10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - in cargo area
Fuses in the cargo area protect trailer and
electric drive functions, amongst other things.
10
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
Positions
Function
A
Electric parking brake, left
30
Electric parking brake, right
30
Rear window defroster
30
Trailer socket 2*
–
15
–
Function
A
Function
A
–
–
Trailer socket 1*
40
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Related information
•
•
•
•
356
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
–
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 347)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 351)
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 353)
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 357)
10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - in the engine compartment's
cold zone
Fuses in the engine compartment's cold zone
are fitted in cars with the Start/Stop function.
10
Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.
•
Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a
workshop14.
•
Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type
and must only be replaced by a workshop14.
•
Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type.
For more information on Start/Stop - see
Start/Stop* (p. 261).
14
Positions
Function
A
Main fuse for central electrical
unit in the engine compartment
175
Main fuse for central electronic
module (CEM) under the glovebox, relay/fuse box under the
glovebox, central electrical unit
in cargo area
175
Function
A
Electric additional heater*
100
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM) under
the glovebox
50
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box
under the glovebox
60
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
357
10 Maintenance and service
||
10
Function
A
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box
under the glovebox
60
Primary fuse for central electrical unit in cargo area
60
Ventilation fan
40
–
–
–
–
Start relay
30
Internal diode
50
Support battery
70
Central electronic module
(CEM) - reference voltage support battery; Charging point
support battery
15
Related information
•
•
•
•
358
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 347)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 351)
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 353)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 356)
10 Maintenance and service
Car washing
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash
with oil separator. Use car shampoo.
Washing by hand
•
•
•
•
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings
contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the
risk of scratches from washing. Do not
spray directly onto the locks.
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent
on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this
case, the surfaces must not be hot from
the sun!
•
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing
drops of water to dry in strong sunlight,
you reduce the risk of water drying stains
which may need to be polished out.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a
workshop. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, when refuelling
for example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching
sponge instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
have condensation on the inside of the
lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is
designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
when the lamp has been switched on for a
time.
Wiper blades
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen
regularly with lukewarm soap solution or
car shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
10
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
everywhere. Handwashing the car is recommended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand
over the first few months. This is because
the paint is more delicate when it is new.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to
the surface of the car (the distance applies to
all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto
the locks.
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper
blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the
windscreen, impair the service life of wiper
blades.
For cleaning:
- Set the wiper blades to the service position,
see Wiper blades (p. 339).
}}
359
10 Maintenance and service
||
Testing the brakes
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
WARNING
10
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking performance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
The heat from the friction causes the brake
linings to warm up and dry. Do the same
thing after starting in very damp or cold
weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, such as glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the
instructions must be followed carefully.
When using degreasant on plastic and
rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is
necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive
must not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended
by Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it
is at least one year old. However, the car can
be waxed during this time. Do not polish or
wax the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car
paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with
liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
the packaging carefully. Many preparations
contain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Related information
•
•
•
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment
such as preserving, sealing, protection,
lustre sealing or similar could damage the
paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by
such treatments is not covered by Volvo
warranty.
Polishing and waxing (p. 360)
Cleaning the interior (p. 361)
Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 361)
Related information
•
360
Car washing (p. 359)
10 Maintenance and service
Water and dirt-repellent coating
Rustproofing
Cleaning the interior
The windows are treated with a surface coating that improves visibility in difficult weather
conditions.
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Maintenance:
The car received a thorough and complete
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
exposed members, cavities, closed sections
and side doors.
•
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as
this could ruin their water-repellent properties.
Inspection and maintenance
•
Take care when cleaning so as not to
damage the glass surface.
•
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
•
Treatment with a special finishing agent
available from Volvo dealers is recommended in order to maintain the waterrepellent properties. This should be used
first after three years and then each year.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
There is natural wear of the waterrepellent coating.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove
ice from the windows. Use the heating to
remove ice from the door mirrors, see Windows and rearview and door mirrors heating (p. 96).
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it
is important to keep the car clean. The car's
rustproofing needs to be checked regularly
and touched-up if necessary in order for it to
be maintained.
Under normal conditions the rustproofing
does not require treatment for approximately
12 years. After this period, it should be treated at three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo
workshop for assistance if the car needs further treatment.
Related information
•
Paint damage (p. 363)
10
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning
of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use
a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift
the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at
each pin.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the bosses in order to avoid
getting caught adjacent to and under the
pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recommended by your Volvo dealer.
Related information
•
Car washing (p. 359)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
361
10 Maintenance and service
||
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery
10
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve its original appearance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beautiful patina over time. The leather is refined
and processed so that it retains its natural
characteristics. It is given a protective coating, but regular cleaning is required in order
to maintain both characteristics and appearance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product
for the cleaning and treatment of leather
upholstery which, when used in accordance
with the instructions, preserves the leather's
protective coating. After a period of use the
natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge, depending more or less on
the surface texture of the leather. This is a
natural maturing of the leather and shows
that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and the application of protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is
available from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
•
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments)
may stain the upholstery.
Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and
leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong
foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved
protection against stains and improved UV
protection.
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
•
Remove dirt and dust with a soft premoistened sponge and neutral soap.
•
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover
the leather steering wheel with protective
plastic.
•
Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
blood)
–
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use
a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for group 1.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
362
10 Maintenance and service
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
Paint damage
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked
regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and
marks on the edges of wings, doors and
bumpers.
2. Same procedure as for group 1.
Stains on interior plastic parts, metal
parts and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
10
Touching up minor paintwork damage
To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent
available from Volvo dealers can be used for
more difficult cleaning.
Materials
•
Seatbelts
primer15 - a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plasticcoated bumpers
•
basecoat and clearcoat - available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks16
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from
your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is
dry before allowing it to retract.
Colour code
•
•
Code for the car's colour
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product label location, see Type designations (p. 366).
masking tape
fine sand paper15.
Related information
•
15
16
Car washing (p. 359)
If required.
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
363
10 Maintenance and service
||
Repair minor paintwork damage such
as stone chips and scratches
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off
with a basecoat and clearcoat once the
primer has dried.
10
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
G021832
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of
paint remains in place, fill in with base coat
and clear coat as soon as the surface has
been cleaned.
Before work is begun, the car must be clean
and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape
to remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use
of a primer is appropriate. In the event of
damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive
primer should be used to give better
results - spray into the lid of the spray
can and brush on thinly.
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a
very fine polishing agent may be carried
out locally if required (e.g. if there are any
uneven edges). The surface is cleaned
thoroughly and left to dry.
364
Related information
•
Rustproofing (p. 361)
SPECIFICATIONS
11 Specifications
Type designations
Type designation, vehicle identification number, etc., i.e. information unique to the car,
can be read on a label in the car.
11
366
11 Specifications
Label location
11
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo
dealer regarding the car and when ordering
spare parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
}}
367
11 Specifications
||
approval number. The label is visible
when the right rear door is opened.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial number.
11
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact
replicas of those in the car. They are
included to show their approximate
appearance and location in the car. The
information that applies to your particular
car is available on the respective decals
for your car.
Related information
•
•
368
Weights (p. 370)
Engine specifications (p. 373)
11 Specifications
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can
be read in the table.
11
Dimensions
mm
Dimensions
A
Wheelbase
2835
B
Length
4854
C
Load length, floor,
folded seat
1927
D
Load length, floor
1094
E
Height
1493
F
Load height
G
Front track
mm
Dimensions
1588A
K
Width including door
mirrors
2106
L
Width including foldedin door mirrors
1907
1578B
H
Rear track
1585A
1575B
I
Load width, floor
J
Width
1130
A
B
C
mm
with 16" wheel
with 17" wheel
with Keyless drive*
1861 (1876C)
368
369
11 Specifications
Weights
WARNING
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read
on a label in the car.
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
11
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (p. 371) (when a trailer is
hitched) influence the load capacity and are
not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car
without extra equipment or accessories.
This means that for every accessory added
the loading capacity of the car is reduced
correspondingly by the weight of the
accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce loading capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as
other accessories such as Towbar, Load
carriers, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety
grille, Carpets, Cargo cover, Power seats,
etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car.
For information on label location, see Type designations (p. 366).
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
Related information
•
370
Towing capacity and towball load (p.
371)
11 Specifications
Towing capacity and towball load
Max. weight braked trailer
Towing capacity and towball load for driving
with a trailer can be read in the tables.
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
All
All
T4
NOTE
The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing
bracket is recommended for trailers heavier than 1800 kg.
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
All
1200
50
B4164T
Manual, MMT6
1600
75
T4
B4164T
Automatic, MPS6
1600
75
T4F
B4164T2
Manual, MMT6
1600
75
T4F
B4164T2
Automatic, MPS6
1600
75
T5
B4204T11
Automatic, TG-81SC
1800
90
T5
B4204T15
Automatic, TG-81SC
1800
90
T5B
B5254T14
Automatic, TF-80SC
1800
90
3.2 AWD
B6324S5
Automatic, TF-80SC
1800
90
T6 AWD
B6304T4
Automatic, TF-80SC
2000
90
D2
D4162T
Manual, MMT6
1300
75
D2
D4162T
Automatic, MPS6
1300
75
D3
D5204T7
Manual, M66
1600
75
D3
D5204T7
Automatic, TF-80SD
1600
75
11
}}
371
11 Specifications
||
11
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
D4
D4204T5
Manual, M66
1800
90
D4
D4204T5
Automatic, TG-81SC
1800
90
D5
D5244T11
Manual, M66
1600
75
D5
D5244T15
Automatic, TF-80SC
2000
90
D5 AWD
D5244T15
Automatic, TF-80SC
2000
90
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 366).
Only certain markets.
A
B
Max. weight unbraked trailer
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
750
Related information
•
•
•
372
Weights (p. 370)
Driving with a trailer (p. 288)
Trailer stabiliser - TSA (p. 294)
50
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (output etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be read in
the table.
Engine
A
B
C
D
Engine codeA
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Output
Output
Torque
(kW/rpm)
(hp/rpm)
(Nm/rpm)
No. of cylinders
Bore
Stroke
(mm)
(mm)
Swept volume
Compression ratio
11
(litres)
T4
B4164T
132/5700
180/5700
240/1600-5000
4
79
81.4
1,596
10.0:1
T4F
B4164T2
132/5700
180/5700
240/1600-5000
4
79
81.4
1,596
10.0:1
T5
B4204T11
180/5500
245/5500
350/1500-4800
4
82
93.2
1,969
10.8:1
T5
B4204T15
161/5500
220/5500
350/1500-4000
4
82
93.2
1,969
10.8:1
T5B
B5254T14
183/5400
249/5400
360/1800–4200
5
83.0
92,3
2,497
9.5:1
3.2
B6324S5
179/6400
243/6400
320/3200
6
84
96
3.192
10.8:1
T6
B6304T4
224/5600
304/5600
440/2100–4200
6
82.0
93.2
2.953
9.3:1
D2
D4162T
84/3600
115/3600
270/1750-2500
4
75
88.3
1.560
16.0:1
D3
D5204T7
100/3500
136/3500
350/1500-2250
5
81.0
77
1.984
16.5:1
D4
D4204T5
133/4250
181/4250
400/1750-2500
4
82.0
93.2
1,969
15.8:1
D5
D5244T11C
158/4000
215/4000
420/1500–3250
5
81.0
93.15
2.400
16.5:1
D5
D5244T15D
158/4000
215/4000
440/1500-3000
5
81.0
93.15
2.400
16.5:1
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 366).
Only certain markets.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
}}
373
11 Specifications
||
Related information
•
•
11
374
Coolant - grade and volume (p. 378)
Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 376)
11 Specifications
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
Related information
•
•
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 376)
Engine oil - general (p. 324)
Check the oil level (p. 325) more frequently for
long journeys:
•
•
•
•
towing a caravan or trailer
11
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or
hotter than +40 °C.
The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends:
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
375
11 Specifications
Engine oil - grade and volume
Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the
table.
Volvo recommends:
11
Engine
Engine codeA
Oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
B6324S5
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
approx 6.8
T6
B6304T4
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
approx 6.8
D3
D5204T7
approx. 5.9
D5
D5244T11B
approx. 5.9
D5
D5244T15C
approx. 5.9
D2
D4162T
3.2
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
376
approx. 3.8
11 Specifications
Engine
Engine codeA
Oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T4
B4164T
Certified and factory-filled oil: Oil grade WSS-M2C925-A
approx. 4.1
options for service:
T4F
B4164T2
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
approx. 4.1
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
A
B
C
D
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
11
T5D
B5254T14
T5
B4204T11
T5
B4204T15
approx. 5.4
D4
D4204T5
approx. 5.6
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or 0w20 VCC RBS0-2AE
approx 5.5
approx. 5.4
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 366).
Manual gearbox.
Automatic gearbox.
Only certain markets.
Related information
•
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
375)
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 325)
377
11 Specifications
Coolant - grade and volume
(litres)
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water2, see the packaging.
Volume
EngineA
11
(litres)
2
378
D2
D4162TC
10.5
D2
D4162TD
11.1
3.2
B6324S5
8.9
T5B
B5254T14
T6
B6304T4
D3
D5204T7
D5
D5244T15
D5
D5244T11
T4
B4164TC
T4F
B4164T2C
T4
B4164TD
T4F
B4164T2D
9.2
9.8
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
Volume
EngineA
Approved coolant volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
T5
B4204T11
T5
B4204T15
D4
D4204T5
A
B
C
D
E
8,9 (9,2E)
Engine code, component and serial number can be read
on the engine; see Type designations (p. 366).
Only certain markets.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater.
Related information
•
8,3 (8,7E)
Coolant - level (p. 328)
11 Specifications
Transmission fluid - grade and volume
The prescribed transmission fluid and volume
for each respective gearbox alternative can be
read in the table.
Manual gearbox
Manual gearbox
MMT6
M66
A
Volume (litres)
approx. 1.7
approx. 1.9 (approx. 1.45A)
Prescribed transmission fluid
BOT 350M3
11
Applies to the D4204T5 engine.
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Prescribed transmission fluid
MPS6
approx. 7.3
BOT 341
TF-80SC
approx. 7.0
AW1
TF-80SD
approx. 7.0
AW1
TG-81SC
A
B
Volume (litres)
approx. 6.6A
approx. 7.5B
AW1
Petrol engines
Diesel engines
}}
379
11 Specifications
||
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.
Related information
11
380
•
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
375)
•
Type designations (p. 366)
11 Specifications
Brake fluid - grade and volume
Power steering fluid - grade
Washer fluid - quality and volume
The medium in a hydraulic brake system is
called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer
force from e.g. a brake pedal via a master
brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders,
which in turn act on a mechanical brake.
Power steering fluid is the denomination of
the medium used in the car's power steering
system.
Washer fluid is used, together with windscreen and rear window wipers (p. 91) to keep
the car's windows and headlamps clean and
ensure visibility when driving.
Prescribed grade: DOT 4
Volume: 0.6 litres
Related information
•
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 329)
Prescribed grade: WSS M2C204-A2 or
equivalent product.
Related information
•
Power steering fluid - level (p. 330)
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point.
Volume:
•
•
11
Cars with headlamp washing: 6.5 litres.
Cars without headlamp washing: 4.5
litres.
Related information
•
•
Washer fluid - filling (p. 340)
Wiper blades (p. 339)
381
11 Specifications
Fuel tank - volume
Fuel tank volume for each respective engine
alternative can be read in the table.
Engine
11
Prescribed grade
Petrol engine
approx. 70
Petrol: Fuel - petrol (p. 284)
Diesel engine
approx. 70
Diesel: Fuel - diesel (p. 284)
Related information
•
•
382
Volume (litres)
Filling up with fuel (p. 282)
Engine specifications (p. 373)
11 Specifications
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
urban driving
Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in
litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams
per km.
extra-urban driving
Explanation
combined driving
gram/km
11
litre/100 km
S80
T4 (B4164T)
–
–
–
–
–
–
T4 (B4164T)
226
9.7
130
5.6
165
7.1
T4FA (B4164T2)
220 (210B)
9.5 (12.8B)
124 (120B)
5.3 (7.3B)
159 (153B)
6.9 (9.3B)
T4FA (B4164T2)
226 (217B)
9.7 (13.2B)
130 (125B)
5.6 (7.6B)
165 (159B)
7,1 (9,7B)
T5 (B4204T11)
–
–
–
–
–
–
319
13.7
163
7.0
219
9.4
3.2 AWD (B6324S5)
}}
383
11 Specifications
||
S80
11
384
T6 AWD (B6304T4)
337
14.5
170
7.3
231
9.9
D2C (D4162T)
140
5.3
106
4.0
119
4,5
D2D (D4162T)
120
4.6
100
3.8
107
4.1
D2C (D4162T)
134
5.1
111
4.2
119
4,5
D2D (D4162T)
125
4.8
100
3.8
109
4.1
D3 (D5204T7)
135
5.1
102
3.9
114
4.3
D3E (D5204T7)
162
6.1
115
4.3
132
5.0
D3F (D5204T7)
159
6.0
112
4.3
129
4.9
D4C (D4204T5)
–
–
–
–
–
–
D4D (D4204T5)
–
–
–
–
–
–
D4C (D4204T5)
–
–
–
–
–
–
11 Specifications
S80
D4D (D4204T5)
–
–
–
–
–
–
D5 (D5244T11)
146
5.6
105
4.0
120
4.6
D5 (D5244T15)
219
8.4
124
4.7
159
6.1
–
–
–
–
–
–
D5 AWD (D5244T15)
A
B
C
D
E
F
Flexifuel engines can be driven on both 95 octane unleaded petrol and bioethanol E85. Both fuels are filled in the common fuel tank so that any variations of mixing ratios between these two fuels
is possible.
E85
Does not apply to the low-emissions variant.
Only applies to the low-emissions variant, max. tyre width 225.
No tyre restrictions.
Tyre restriction, max. tyre width 225.
NOTE
If the consumption and emission data is
missing then it is included in the enclosed
supplement.
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU cycles3,
3
11
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the
basic version and without extra equipment.
The car's weight may increase depending on
equipment. This, as well as how heavily the
car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and
carbon dioxide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel
consumption compared with the table's values. Examples of this are:
•
•
The driver's driving style.
If the customer has specified wheels
larger than those fitted as standard on the
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007
(Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the
engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with D2, D3, D4 or D5 engine and 6speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear. The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legislation.
CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
}}
385
11 Specifications
||
model's basic version, then resistance
increases.
11
•
High speed results in increased wind
resistance.
•
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to3.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may
arise in a comparison with the EU driving
cycles3 which are used in the certification of
the car and on which the consumption figures
in the table are based.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that
could affect the car's performance.
Related information
•
•
3
386
Economical driving (p. 287)
Weights (p. 370)
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007
(Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the
engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with D2, D3, D4 or D5 engine and 6speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear. The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legislation.
CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
11 Specifications
Tyres - approved tyre pressures
NOTE
Approved tyre pressures for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
S80
Tyre size
Engine
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1-3 persons
Max. load
ECO pressureA
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)B
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
225/55 R 16
0 – 160
230
210
260
260
260
3.2
225/50 R 17
160 +
280
280
290
290
–
T6
235/40 R 18
0 – 160
230
210
260
260
260
235/40 R 19
160 +
290
290
320
320
–
225/55 R 16
0 – 160
220
210
260
260
260
225/50 R 17
160 +
260
260
280
280
–
235/40 R 18
0 – 160
230
210
260
260
260
235/40 R 19
160 +
280
280
300
300
–
D5
11
}}
387
11 Specifications
||
S80
Tyre size
Engine
T4
T4F
11
T5
D2
Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1-3 persons
Max. load
ECO pressureA
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)B
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
225/55 R 16
0 – 160
220
210
260
260
260
225/50 R 17
160 +
260
260
270
270
–
0 – 160
230
210
260
260
260
160 +
270
270
290
290
–
max. 80
420
420
420
420
–
205/60 R
16C
205/55 R 17D
D3
215/50 R 17E
D4
235/40 R 18
235/40 R 19
Temporary Spare Tyre
A
B
C
D
E
Economical driving.
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Not approved for T5 (B5254T12) or T5 (B5254T14).
Only approved for D2 Low emission variant and D4 Low emission variant.
Not approved for T5, D4 and D2 low-emissions variant.
WARNING
19-inch wheels must never be used on
cars that are not equipped with the RDesign or Sport chassis options. The use
of 19-inch wheels on cars with standard
chassis constitutes a safety risk, with a
risk of vehicle damage, and it impairs the
car's driving characteristics.
388
Related information
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 304)
Tyres - air pressure (p. 309)
Type designations (p. 366)
11 Specifications
Electrical system
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
Starter battery capacity is dependent upon
the equipment level in the car.
IMPORTANT
11
If the battery is replaced, take care to
replace it with a battery with the same cold
starting capacity and reserve capacity as
the original battery (see the label on the
battery).
Related information
•
•
•
Starter battery - specification (p. 390)
Starter battery - replacement (p. 342)
Battery (p. 341)
389
11 Specifications
Starter battery - specification
The starter battery is used to drive the starter
motor and other electrical equipment in the
car.
Engine
11
Cold start capacity,
Reserve capacity
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
(minutes)
Petrol (Ethanol)
12
520–800
100–160
Diesel
12
700–800
135–160
Petrol/Diesel with Start/Stop function
12
760A
135
A
Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with the Start/Stop function.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, take care to
replace it with a battery with the same cold
starting capacity and reserve capacity as
the original battery (see the label on the
battery).
NOTE
•
The starter battery's container size
should be consistent with the original
battery's dimensions.
•
The starter battery's height is different
depending on size.
Related information
•
•
390
Voltage (V)
Starter battery - replacement (p. 342)
Battery (p. 341)
11 Specifications
Type approval - remote control key
system
Type approval for the remote control key system can be read in the table.
Country/Area
China
Type approval - radar system
Type approval for the radar system can be
read in the table.
Lock system, standard
Country/Area
EU, China
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)
Country/Area
EU
Hong Kong
11
Related information
•
Remote control key with key blade (p.
150)
Korea
391
11 Specifications
||
Country/
Area
Singapore
IDA: Infocomm Development
Authority of Singapore.
11
Brazil
Europe
Delphi Electronics &
Safety hereby declares that
L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR
are in compliance with the
essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC. This declaration of conformity may, if
necessary, be consulted with
Delphi Electronics & Safety /
One Corporate Center /
Kokomo, Indiana 46904-9005
USA.
Related information
•
392
Radar sensor (p. 191)
11 Specifications
Type approval - Bluetooth®
Type approval for Bluetooth® can be read in
the table.
11
}}
393
11 Specifications
||
Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)
Country/
Area
Countries
in the EU:
Exporting country: Japan
11
Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.
Type of equipment: Bluetooth® device
For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing
394
11 Specifications
Country/
Area
Czech
Republic:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento Bluetooth® Module je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark:
Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Bluetooth® Module overholder de væsentlige krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany:
Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät Bluetooth® Module in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Estonia:
Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth® Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja
nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK
Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth® Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain:
Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth® Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece:
ΜΕ ΗΝ ΠΑΡΟ ΣΑ Alpine Electronics, Inc. ΗΛΩΝΕ Ο Bluetooth® Module Σ ΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕ Α ΠΡΟΣ
ΑΠΑ ΗΣΕ Σ Α Σ ΛΟ ΠΕΣ ΣΧΕ
ΕΣ Α ΑΞΕ Σ ΗΣ Ο Η ΑΣ 1999/5/Ε .
France:
Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil Bluetooth® Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux
autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy:
Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth® Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia:
Ar šo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklarē, ka Bluetooth® Module atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to
saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lithuania:
Šiuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis Bluetooth® Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos
nuostatas.
11
ΣΟ ΣΩ ΕΣ
}}
395
11 Specifications
||
Country/
Area
11
396
Netherlands:
Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth® Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de
andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malta:
Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth® Module jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti
oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary:
Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth® Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Poland:
Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. oświadcza, że Bluetooth® Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi
stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth® Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovenia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth® Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovakia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že Bluetooth® Module spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Finland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että Bluetooth® Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja
sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden:
Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth® Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav
och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth® Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and
other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
Norway:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret Bluetooth® Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
11 Specifications
Country/
Area
China:
第十三条
进口和生产厂商在其产品的说明书或使用手册中，应刊印下述有关内容
1. 标明附件中所规定的技术指标和使用范围，说明所有控制
■ 使用频率
调整及开关等使用方法
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射
率(EIRP)
天线增益
10dBi 时
≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm
①
11
■ 最大
率谱密度
■ 载频容限
10dBi 时
≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
20 ppm
■ 杂散发射(辐射)
•
•
•
•
•
天线增益
率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2. 不得擅自更改发射频率
大发射
率(包括额外
3. 使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业
继续使用
4. 使用微
率无线电设备，必须忍
装射频
产生有害干扰
各种无线电业
率放大器)，不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
一旦发现有干扰现象时，应立即停止使用，并采
的干扰或工业
措施消除干扰后方可
科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5. 不得在飞机和机场附近使用
}}
397
11 Specifications
||
Country/
Area
Taiwan:
低効率電波輻射性電機管理辧法第十条
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司
商號或使用者均不得擅自 變更頻率
加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
11
398
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時， 應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用
前項合法通信，指依電信法規定 作業之無線電通信 低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波 輻射性電機設備之
干擾
11 Specifications
Country/
Area
South
Korea:
제품 정보
Volvo Car Korea
신청자 코드: KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L3, KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L2 and KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L1
제품 명: Bluetooth Audio Navigation Radio
모델 명: IAM2.1
11
산 날짜: March/2010
Alpine Electronics, Inc
Made in Japan
고객 정보
Volvo Car Korea
볼보자동차코리아
서울시 용산구 한남 2 동 726-173 볼보빌딩 4 층
볼보자동차 고객센터 1588-1777
http://www.volvocars.com/kr
사용자 주의사항
※당해 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다
}}
399
11 Specifications
||
Country/
Area
The United
Arab Emirates:
11
South
Africa:
Jamaica:
Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1
Thailand:
This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
Oman
400
11 Specifications
Licenses
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from
clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991,
1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright
(c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University
of California. All or some portions are derived
from material licensed to the University of
California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories,
Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met: Redistributions of source
code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form
must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION>
nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior
written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL
Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1,
released January 26, 2000, developed by
Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is
Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics,
Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third
parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All
Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Software is furnished to do so,
subject to the following conditions: The
above copyright notice including the dates of
first publication and either this permission
notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software. THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc.
shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in
this Software without prior written
authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
11
}}
401
11 Specifications
||
This software is based in parts on the work of
the FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
([email protected]). All rights reserved
Combined Instrument Panel Software
Open Source Software Notice
11
This product uses certain free / open source
and other software originating from third
parties, that is subject to the GNU General
Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/
GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License
version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project
License (“FreeType License”) and other
different and/or additional copyright licenses,
disclaimers and notices. The links how to
access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3,
LGPLv3, and the other open source software
licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and
notices are provided to you below. Please
refer to the exact terms of the relevant
License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers
to provide the source code of said free/open
source software to you for a charge covering
the cost of performing such distribution, such
as the cost of media, shipping and handling,
upon written request. Please contact your
nearest Volvo Dealer.
This offer is valid for a period of at least three
(3) years from the date of the distribution of
402
this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC
offers spare parts or customer support.
GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL),
etc.
Portions of this product uses software
copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The
FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights
reserved.
You have the right of acquisition,
modification, and distribution of the source
code of the GPL/LGPL software.
This product includes software under
following licenses:
GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/oldlicenses/gpl-2.0.html
•
•
•
Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista
2.6.31 kernel and kernel from
L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)
uBoot (based on v2009.08)
busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)
GCC runtime library exception: http://
www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html
•
libgcc_s.so.1
LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
lgpl.html
•
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
The website provides the Source Code "As
Is" and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
DivX®
Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1
The FreeType Project License: http://
www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT
•
libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)
Linux software
This product contains software licensed
under GNU General Public License (GPL) or
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video. DivX®,
DivX Certified® and associated logos are
11 Specifications
registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are
used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
DivX® is a digital video format created by
DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified
device that plays DivX video. Visit
www.divx.com for more information and
software tools to convert your files into DivX
video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order
to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
content. To generate the registration code,
locate the DivX VOD section in the device
setup menu. Go to http://vod.divx.com with
this code to complete the registration
process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S.
Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
7,519,274.
Related information
•
Volvo Sensus (p. 65)
Symbols in the display
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided
into warning, indicator and information symbols. Shown below are the most common
symbols with their meanings and a reference
to where in the manual further information can
be found.
Symbol
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when
a fault has been indicated which could affect
the safety and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown in the combined
instrument panel at the same time.
- Information symbol, illuminates in
combination with text in the combined instrument panel, when a deviation in any of the
car's systems has occurred. The information
symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
Specification
See
Low oil pressure
(p. 61)
Parking brake
applied
(p. 61), (p.
275)
Parking brake
applied, alternative symbol
(p. 61)
Specification
See
Airbags – SRS
(p. 25), (p.
61)
Seatbelt reminder
(p. 22), (p.
61)
Alternator not
charging
(p. 61)
Fault in brake
system
(p. 61), (p.
272)
Warning, safety
mode
(p. 25), (p.
35), (p. 61),
(p. 258)
11
Control symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
Specification
See
ABL fault*
(p. 60), (p.
81)
Emissions system
(p. 60)
ABS fault
(p. 60), (p.
272)
Rear fog lamp on
(p. 60), (p.
82)
Stability system,
DSTC
(p. 60), (p.
176)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
403
11 Specifications
||
Symbol
11
404
Specification
See
Stability system,
sport mode
(p. 60), (p.
176)
Engine preheater
(diesel)
(p. 60)
Low level in fuel
tank
(p. 60), (p.
133)
Information, read
display text
(p. 60)
Main beam On
(p. 60), (p.
79)
Left-hand direction indicators
(p. 60)
Right-hand direction indicators
(p. 60)
Start/Stop*,
engine autostopped
(p. 60), (p.
268)
ECO function* on
(p. 60), (p.
270)
Not used
–
Information symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
–
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Specification
See
Cruise control*
(p. 180)
Adaptive cruise
control*
(p. 195)
Adaptive cruise
control*, time interval
(p. 182),
(p. 185)
Adaptive cruise
control*, Distance
Warning* (Distance
Alert)
(p. 187),
(p. 197)
Radar sensor*
(p. 195),
(p. 199),
(p. 217)
–
–
Camera sensor*,
Laser sensor*
(p. 206),
(p. 217),
(p. 221),
(p. 226)
Auto Brake*, Distance Warning*
(Distance Alert),
City SafetyTM, Collision warning system*
(p. 199),
(p. 206),
(p. 217)
Symbol
Specification
See
ABL system*
(p. 81)
Driver Alert System*, Time for a
break
(p. 220)
Driver Alert System*, Time for a
break
(p. 221)
Parking brake
(p. 275)
Rain sensor*
(p. 91)
Active high beam,
AHB (Active High
Beam)*
(p. 80)
Windscreen sensor*
(p. 80)
Start/Stop*
(p. 268)
Start/Stop*
(p. 268)
11 Specifications
Symbol
Specification
See
Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
(p. 221),
(p. 226)
Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*
(p. 224)
Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*
(p. 226)
Recorded speed
information*
(p. 177)
Engine block and
passenger compartment heater*
(p. 133)
Activated timer*
(p. 133)
Activated timer*
(p. 133)
Low battery
(p. 133)
Fuel filler flap,
right-hand side
(p. 282)
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol
Specification
See
Seatbelt reminder
(p. 24)
Airbag, passenger
seat, activated
(p. 28)
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
(p. 28)
11
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 60)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 61)
•
Messages - handling (p. 102)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
405
12 Alphabetical Index
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 81
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 28
driver's side.................................... 27, 34
passenger side......................... 27, 28, 34
Active chassis - FOUR-C......................... 174
AIRBAG ..................................................... 27
Active high beam....................................... 80
Airbag system............................................ 26
warning symbol.................................... 25
A
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 182
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 81
Active Yaw Control.................................. 174
Adapting driving characteristics...... 174, 239
12
406
Adaptive Cruise Control...........................
change cruise control functionality.....
deactivate...........................................
fault tracing.........................................
function...............................................
managing speed.................................
overtaking...........................................
overview..............................................
radar sensor........................................
setting the time interval......................
standby mode.....................................
temporary deactivation.......................
182
191
189
194
183
186
188
185
191
187
187
187
Air cleaning
material............................................... 118
passenger compartment.... 116, 117, 118
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 272
Approach lighting.............................. 86, 152
Automatic car washes............................. 359
Automatic gearbox.......................... 255, 258
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 255
towing and recovery........................... 296
trailer................................................... 290
Automatic relocking................................. 165
AWD, All Wheel Drive............................... 272
Air conditioning........................................ 125
Air conditioning system
repair................................................... 331
B
Air distribution.......................................... 119
Recirculation....................................... 126
table.................................................... 128
Backrest..................................................... 69
front seat, lowering............................... 69
Air quality system IAQS........................... 118
Bag holder .............................................. 147
Additional heater
electric........................................ 135, 136
fuel-driven........................................... 135
Alarm........................................ 170, 171, 172
alarm indicator.................................... 171
alarm signals....................................... 172
automatic re-arming........................... 171
checking the alarm............................. 154
reduced alarm level............................ 172
remote control key not working.......... 171
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 74
Alcolock................................................... 241
Battery..................................... 280, 341, 390
jump starting....................................... 252
maintenance....................................... 341
overload.............................................. 280
remote control key/PCC..................... 158
specification....................................... 390
symbols on the battery....................... 342
warning symbols................................. 342
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 117
Bioethanol E85........................................ 286
All Wheel Drive, (AWD)............................. 272
BLIS................................................. 235, 236
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 71
12 Alphabetical Index
Bonnet, opening...................................... 322
Boot lid.................................................... 166
Locking/unlocking.............................. 166
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 329
Brake fluid
grade and volume............................... 381
Brake light.................................................. 83
Brakes.............................................. 272, 273
Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 273
brake light............................................. 83
brake system.............................. 272, 273
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 274
emergency brake lights........................ 83
filling brake fluid.................................. 330
handbrake........................................... 275
symbols in the combined instrument
panel................................................... 272
Cargo area
carpet.................................................. 143
loading................................................ 144
load retaining eyelets.......................... 146
Car upholstery......................................... 361
Car washing............................................. 359
Catalytic converter................................... 285
Recovery............................................. 296
Chassis settings...................................... 174
Checking the engine oil level................... 324
rims..................................................... 360
seatbelts............................................. 363
upholstery........................................... 361
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 117
Climate control
actual temperature.............................
auto-regulation...................................
general................................................
personal preferences..........................
sensors...............................................
temperature control............................
116
124
115
118
116
124
Children
child safety locks.................................. 37
child seat and airbag............................ 43
child seats and side airbags................. 31
location in car....................................... 43
safety.............................................. 31, 37
Clock
analogue............................................... 65
Child safety locks............................ 168, 169
Collision warning............................. 207, 208
Car care................................................... 359
Child seats.................................................
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats...
recommended......................................
size classes for child seats with ISOFIX fixture system.................................
types.....................................................
upper mounting points for child seats..
Collision warning system
function............................................... 208
general limitations............................... 213
operation............................................. 212
Pedestrian detection........................... 211
Radar sensor.............................. 191, 200
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 362
City Safety™............................................ 200
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 332
C
Camera sensor................................ 202, 215
37
43
38
44
45
47
Cleaning
automatic car wash............................ 359
car washing........................................ 359
12
Clock, adjustment...................................... 64
CO2 emissions......................................... 383
Collision..................................................... 35
Collision Warning System with Auto
Brake....................................................... 207
Colour code, paint................................... 363
Combined instrument panel................ 55, 56
407
12 Alphabetical Index
Compass................................................... 97
calibration............................................. 97
Condensation in headlamps.................... 359
Controls, lights........................................... 75
Control symbols................................... 56, 58
12
Defroster.................................................. 125
Detachable towbar
storage................................................ 291
Diesel....................................................... 284
run out of fuel..................................... 284
E
Coolant
volume and grade............................... 378
Diesel particle filter.................................. 287
Dimensions.............................................. 369
ECC, electronic climate control............... 121
Coolant, checking and filling................... 328
Dipstick, electronic.......................... 326, 327
Eco Cruise............................................... 270
Cooler box............................................... 143
Direction indicator..................................... 84
EcoGuide................................................... 59
Cooling system........................................ 279
overheating......................................... 279
Direction indicators.................................... 84
Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual........... 20
direction of rotation................................. 300
Economical driving.................................. 287
Crash, see Collision................................... 35
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 260
ECO pressure.......................................... 387
Cruise control..........................................
deactivate...........................................
managing speed.................................
resume set speed...............................
temporary deactivation.......................
Display lighting.......................................... 77
Electrical socket...................................... 142
cargo area........................................... 147
180
182
180
182
181
Cyclist detection...................................... 209
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 117
Distance Warning.................................... 197
Limitations.......................................... 198
Symbols and messages..................... 199
Door mirrors............................................... 94
Driver Alert Control.................................. 219
operation............................................. 220
Driver Alert System.................................. 219
D
Daytime running lights............................... 78
Deadlock.................................................. 167
deactivation........................................ 167
temporary deactivation....................... 168
408
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 371
towing capacity.................................. 371
Driving......................................................
cooling system....................................
with a tailer.........................................
with boot lid open...............................
281
279
288
280
Driving in water........................................ 279
Electrical system...................................... 389
Electric parking brake
low battery voltage............................. 275
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 121
Emergency equipment
first aid kit........................................... 311
warning triangle.................................. 310
Emergency puncture repair............. 311, 312
action.................................................. 313
inflating the tyres................................ 316
rechecking.......................................... 315
12 Alphabetical Index
Emergency puncture repair kit
location............................................... 312
overview.............................................. 313
sealing fluid......................................... 317
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 383
Engine
deactivate...........................................
overheating.........................................
start.....................................................
Start/Stop...........................................
247
288
246
261
Engine and passenger compartment heater
direct start/immediate stop................ 131
messages........................................... 133
timer.................................................... 131
Engine block heater......................... 130, 251
Engine compartment
coolant................................................
oil........................................................
overview..............................................
power steering fluid............................
328
324
322
330
Engine oil......................................... 324, 375
adverse driving conditions.................. 375
filter..................................................... 324
grade and volume............................... 376
Engine specifications............................... 373
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 195
Driver Alert Control............................. 221
Lane Departure Warning..................... 226
see Messages and symbols....... 195, 277
Error messages in BLIS........................... 238
ERS - Remote Start................................. 248
exhaust gases, toxic, sucked in.............. 280
External dimensions................................ 369
F
Fan
ECC.................................................... 124
Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 203
First aid.................................................... 311
First aid kit............................................... 311
Flexifuel.................................................... 251
Fluids, capacities............. 378, 379, 381, 382
Fluids and oils.......................... 378, 379, 381
Fog lamp
rear........................................................ 82
Foot brake....................................... 272, 273
FOUR-C - Active chassis......................... 174
Front seat
Adjusting front - rear............................. 73
Lumbar................................................. 73
Massage............................................... 73
FSC, ecolabelling....................................... 20
Fuel.......................................... 283, 284, 286
fuel consumption................................ 383
fuel economy.............................. 309, 310
fuel filter.............................................. 285
Fuel-driven heater
direct start/immediate stop................ 131
timer.................................................... 131
Fuelling
filling...................................................
fuel cap...............................................
fuel filler flap.......................................
fuel filler flap, manual opening............
282
282
282
282
12
Fuel tank
volume................................................ 382
Fuse box.................................................. 346
Fuses....................................................... 345
by instrument panel - Executive......... 355
cargo area........................................... 356
changing............................................. 345
cold zone............................................ 357
engine compartment.......................... 347
General............................................... 345
Start/Stop........................................... 357
under glovebox........................... 351, 353
409
12 Alphabetical Index
G
Gearbox................................................... 253
automatic.................................... 255, 258
manual................................................ 253
Gear indicator.......................................... 254
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 260
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disengagement................................................. 260
Geartronic................................................ 255
12
Glass........................................................ 143
laminated/reinforced............................. 20
Headlamp pattern adjustment................... 87
Active Bending Lights .......................... 87
Halogen headlamp............................... 87
Headlamps............................................... 332
head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 71
lowering................................................ 72
Heated washer nozzles.............................. 92
Heating
rearview and door mirrors.................... 96
rear window.......................................... 96
seats................................................... 122
steering wheel....................................... 75
Information display.............................. 55, 56
Inlaid mats............................................... 141
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 77
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car................................ 49
right-hand drive car.............................. 52
Instruments and controls..................... 49, 52
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
Air cleaning......................................... 118
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 84
Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 16
Interior rearview mirror............................... 96
automatic dimming............................... 97
Gross vehicle weight............................... 370
High engine temperature......................... 288
Intermittent wiping..................................... 91
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 254
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 92
Glovebox................................................. 141
locking................................................ 166
Hill Start Assist........................................ 261
Home safe light duration........................... 86
H
Horn........................................................... 74
Hazard warning flashers............................ 83
Headlamp control...................................... 75
J
Jack......................................................... 303
Jacket holder........................................... 140
Handbrake............................................... 275
Journey statistics..................................... 113
I
Headlamp levelling.................................... 77
IAQS - Interior Air Quality System........... 118
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 87
Immobiliser.............................................. 151
Indicator symbols...................................... 60
Inflatable curtain.................................. 31, 34
410
Information button, PCC.......................... 154
Jump starting........................................... 252
12 Alphabetical Index
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 370
Key........................................... 150, 151, 163
Key blade......................................... 155, 156
Keyless drive 159, 160, 161, 162, 163,
164,
246
Keyless - locking..................................... 161
Keyless start (keyless drive) 159, 160,
161,
162,
163,
164,
246
Keyless - unlocking................................. 162
Keypad in the steering wheel.................... 74
Key positions............................................. 66
L
Labels...................................................... 366
Laminated glass......................................... 20
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 331
Lane Departure Control................... 223, 224
Lane keeping assistant
operation..................................... 224, 225
Laser sensor............................................ 204
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 362
Light indications, PCC............................. 154
Lighting.................................................... 331
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 81
approach lighting.......................... 86, 152
automatic lighting, passenger compartment............................................... 85
bulbs, specifications........................... 338
controls................................................. 84
daytime running lights.......................... 78
display lighting...................................... 77
headlamp levelling................................ 77
home safe lighting................................ 86
instrument lighting................................ 77
in the passenger compartment............. 84
main/dipped beam............................... 79
position/parking lamps......................... 77
rear fog lamp........................................ 82
tunnel detection.................................... 78
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 332
bulb holder rear: direction indicators
rear, rear fog lamp and reversing
lamp.................................................... 335
cargo area........................................... 337
dipped beam (cars with halogen headlamps)................................................. 333
direction indicators, front.................... 334
main beam (cars with active xenon
headlamps)......................................... 334
main beam (cars with halogen headlamps)................................................. 334
number plate lighting.......................... 337
side marker lamps.............................. 335
vanity mirror........................................ 337
Loading
General...............................................
load retaining eyelets..........................
long load.............................................
roof load.............................................
144
146
145
146
Lock
locking................................................ 164
unlocking.................................... 164, 165
Lockable wheel bolts............................... 302
Lock confirmation ................................... 151
12
Locking/unlocking
glovebox............................................. 166
inside.................................................. 165
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lighting............... 79
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 80
maintenance
Rustproofing....................................... 361
Manual gearbox.......................................
GSI - Gear selector assistance...........
Towing and recovery..........................
trailer...................................................
253
254
296
290
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 255
411
12 Alphabetical Index
Massage
front seat............................................... 73
MY CAR................................................... 103
Parking brake........................................... 275
Max. roof load.......................................... 370
Memory function in seat............................ 70
O
Passenger compartment filter................. 117
Menus
Combined instrument panel............... 100
menu overview.................................... 101
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 375, 376
Passenger compartment heater.............. 130
Oil level low.............................................. 324
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................. 152
range........................................... 155, 160
Messages................................................ 102
Information display............................. 101
12
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 195
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 206, 217
Driver Alert Control............................. 221
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater........................... 133
Lane Departure Warning..................... 226
Messages in BLIS.................................... 238
Meters
fuel gauge....................................... 55, 57
speedometer................................... 55, 57
tachometer..................................... 55, 57
misting
attending to the windows................... 115
Misting
condensation in headlamps............... 359
Mood lighting............................................. 85
412
Park assist camera.................................. 232
settings............................................... 234
Output...................................................... 373
outside temperature gauge....................... 63
Overheating............................................. 288
Owner's manual, ecolabelling.................... 20
Pedestrian detection................................ 207
Petrol grade............................................. 284
Pinch protection, sunroof........................ 100
Polishing.................................................. 360
Position/parking lamps.............................. 77
P
PACOS....................................................... 28
Paddle on the steering wheel.................... 74
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 363
damage and touch-up........................ 363
Panel lighting............................................. 77
Panic function.......................................... 152
Park Assist...............................................
backward............................................
fault indicator......................................
function...............................................
parking assistance sensors................
228
229
231
228
231
Power guide............................................... 59
Power seat................................................. 69
Powershift gearbox.......................... 258, 296
Power steering fluid
grade................................................... 381
Power sunroof........................................... 98
Power windows......................................... 92
Privacy locking......................................... 157
12 Alphabetical Index
Regeneration........................................... 287
Q
Queue Assist............................................ 189
Queue Assistant....................................... 189
R
Radar sensor........................................... 183
Limitations.................................. 191, 192
Rain sensor................................................ 91
Rear bulbs
location............................................... 336
Rear seat
Heating............................................... 122
Rearview and door mirrors
compass...............................................
door......................................................
electrically retractable...........................
heating..................................................
interior...................................................
97
94
95
96
96
Rear window, defrosting............................ 96
Recommendations during driving............ 281
Recommended child seats
table...................................................... 38
Recovery.................................................. 298
Refrigerant............................................... 331
Relay/fuse box, see Fuses....................... 345
Remote control immobiliser..................... 152
Remote control key......................... 150, 151
battery replacement............................ 158
detachable key blade................. 155, 156
functions............................................. 152
loss..................................................... 150
range........................................... 153, 160
Remote control key system, type approval............................................................ 391
S
Safety lock
children................................................. 37
Safety mode.............................................. 35
moving the car...................................... 37
start attempt......................................... 36
Sealing fluid............................................. 317
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 68
Resetting the power windows................... 93
Seatbelt......................................................
loosen...................................................
pregnancy.............................................
putting on.............................................
rear seat................................................
seatbelt reminder..................................
seatbelt tensioner.................................
Retractable power door mirrors................. 95
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 24
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 254
Seatbelt tensioner................................ 25, 34
Road sign information............................. 177
Limitations.......................................... 179
operation............................................. 177
Seats.......................................................... 68
head restraints, rear.............................. 71
heating................................................ 122
Heating............................................... 122
lowering the front backrest................... 69
lowering the rear backrest.................... 71
power.................................................... 69
ventilated front seats.......................... 123
Remote Start - ERS................................. 248
Resetting, trip meter................ 107, 110, 112
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 95
Roof load, max. weight............................ 370
Rustproofing............................................ 361
22
23
23
23
24
24
25
12
Sensus....................................................... 65
Service position....................................... 339
413
12 Alphabetical Index
Service programme................................. 319
SIPS airbag................................................ 30
Steering wheel...........................................
heating..................................................
keypad..................................................
paddle...................................................
steering wheel adjustment....................
Skidding................................................... 281
Stone chips and scratches...................... 363
Ski hatch.................................................. 145
Storage compartment.............................. 143
slippery driving conditions....................... 281
Storage spaces
glovebox............................................. 141
Jacket holder...................................... 140
tunnel console.................................... 140
Set time interval....................................... 197
Side airbag SIPS.................................. 30, 34
Soot filter................................................. 287
SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 287
12
spare wheel............................................. 306
installation........................................... 308
Speed ratings, tyres................................. 305
Spin control............................................. 174
Temperature
actual temperature............................. 116
Temperature control................................ 124
Towbar
detachable, attachment...................... 292
detachable, removal........................... 293
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 99
Start/Stop................................................ 261
Function and operation...................... 262
the engine does not stop.................... 264
Switching off the engine.......................... 247
Steering lock............................................ 247
T
Sun blind.................................................... 94
Stains....................................................... 361
Steering force level, see Steering force... 239
System
tripping.................................................. 34
Tools........................................................ 302
Stability system....................................... 174
Steering force, speed related.................. 239
Driver Alert Control............................. 221
Lane Departure Warning..................... 226
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment.................................................. 138
Sunroof
opening and closing............................. 98
pinch protection.................................. 100
sunscreen............................................. 99
ventilation position................................ 99
Stability and traction control system 174,
176
operation............................................. 175
414
74
75
74
74
74
Total airing function......................... 115, 166
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 291
Towbar - detachable
attachment/removal.................... 292, 293
Towing..................................................... 295
towing eye.......................................... 297
Symbols
indicator symbols..................... 56, 58, 60
warning symbols............................. 56, 58
Towing bracket........................................ 291
specifications...................................... 291
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 195
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 206, 217
Towing eye.............................................. 297
Towing capacity and towball load........... 371
Traction control........................................ 174
12 Alphabetical Index
Trailer....................................................... 288
cable........................................... 288, 289
driving with a trailer............................ 288
snaking............................................... 294
Trailer stability assist............................... 175
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 294
Transmission............................................ 253
Transmission oil
volume and grade............................... 379
Transponder.............................................. 16
Tread depth............................................. 303
Tread wear indicators.............................. 302
Type designations................................... 366
Tyre dimension........................................ 304
Tyre load index........................................ 305
Tyre pressure label.................................. 309
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 300
maintenance....................................... 300
pressure...................................... 309, 387
puncture repair................................... 311
specifications...................................... 387
tread depth......................................... 303
tread wear indicators.......................... 302
winter tyres......................................... 303
Trip computer.......... 104, 105, 109, 112, 113
Trip meter.................................................. 64
Trip meter, resetting................ 107, 110, 112
U
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 194
Unlocking
from the inside.................................... 165
from the outside................................. 164
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 175, 294
Tunnel console........................................ 140
12 V socket......................................... 142
cigarette lighter and ashtray............... 140
Unlocking with the key blade................... 162
Tunnel detection........................................ 78
V
Type approval
Bluetooth®.......................................... 393
radar system....................................... 391
remote control key system................. 391
Volvo Sensus............................................. 65
W
Warning lamp
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 183
collision warning system.................... 212
stability and traction control system.. 174
Warning lamps
Airbags – SRS....................................... 61
alternator not charging......................... 61
Fault in brake system........................... 61
Low oil pressure................................... 61
Parking brake applied........................... 61
seatbelt reminder............................ 24, 61
Warning................................................ 61
12
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 212
Warning symbols........................... 56, 58, 61
Warning triangle....................................... 310
Washer fluid
volume................................................ 381
Vanity mirror...................................... 85, 141
Ventilation................................................ 119
Vibration damper..................................... 291
Washer fluid, filling................................... 340
Washer nozzles, heated............................. 92
Washers
washer fluid, filling.............................. 340
windscreen........................................... 92
415
12 Alphabetical Index
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 361
Windscreen wiper...................................... 91
rain sensor............................................ 91
Waxing..................................................... 360
Winter driving........................................... 281
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 370
Winter tyres.............................................. 303
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 361
Wheel bolts.............................................. 302
lockable.............................................. 302
Wheel rim, dimensions............................ 304
Wheel rims
cleaning.............................................. 360
12
Wheels
installation........................................... 308
removal............................................... 306
snow chains........................................ 303
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 32
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 33
seating position.................................... 33
whiplash protection........................ 32, 34
Window
sun blind............................................... 94
Windows, rearview and door mirrors. 20, 361
Windscreen
heating................................................ 125
Windscreen, heating.................................. 96
Windscreen washing.................................. 92
416
Wiper blades............................................
changing.............................................
Cleaning..............................................
Service position..................................
339
339
340
339
Wipers and washing.................................. 91
Volvo Car Corporation TP 16857 (English), AT 1346, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2013, Copyright © 2000-2013 Volvo Car Corporation
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
advertisement
© 2021